Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (180 trang)

GA Anh 7 2010

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (768.97 KB, 180 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Preparation: 17/08/2010


Teaching : 23/08/2010



<b>Period 01.</b>

<b>REVision</b>



<b>I</b>. <b>Aims: </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of this lesson ss will be able to review the target items that
they learned and review grammar structures that ss learned last year.


2. Skill: 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II. Preparation</b>:


1. Teacher: Lesson plan, Text book, posters, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III. Procedures</b>


<b>1. Organization: ( 1</b>’<b> ) </b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson ( No )</b>
<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T & SS’ ACTIVITIES CONTENTS TIME


1. <i><b>Activity 1:</b></i>


-T: reminds ss how to use the


present simple tense of “to be”.


-T: asks ss to give examples.


-T reminds ss how to use the present
simple tense of ordinary verbs.


-T asks ss to give examples.


-T asks ss what subjects are used with
“do” and what subjects are used with
“does”.


<i><b>2. Activity 2 </b></i>


- SS do these exercises.


<b>1</b>. Present simple tense of “To be”:
am, is , are : thì, là, ở


-I am


Ex: I am a student.


-He, she, it, 1 ngêi, 1 tªn riªng – is.
EX: Ba is a student.


She is a teacher.


-We, you, they, 2 ngêi trë lªn – are


Ex: You are a doctor.


Nam and Lan are students.


2. Present simple tense of ordinary verb
-Affirmative form:


S + V


Ex: I play football.


+ S: He, she, it, 1 tên riêng + Vs.
-V tận cùng là: s, sh, ch, o, x, z + es.


Ex: He works in a hospital.
Lan watches TV.


-Negative form:


S + donot/doesnot + V.
Donot = don’t
doesnot = doesn’t


+I, we, you, they, 2 ngêi trë lªn + do.
+He, she, it, 1 ngêi + does.


-Interrogative form:
Do/Does + S + V?
Yes, S + do/does.
No, S + don’t/doesn’t.


Ex: Do you like music?


Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.


<b>II. Practice</b>


1. Order these words to complete these
sentences.


a. you / are / how ?
b. what / job / is / your ?


15’


15’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

- T helps them to do and corrects later.


c. Mary / engineers / and / are / Peter.
d. What / your / mother / do / and your /


father / do ?


e. Are / teachers / they.


2. Each sentence has a mistake, find
and correct it.


a. what you do in the morning ?



b. I get up five o’clock in the morning.
c. I haves breakfast at 6:00 and go to


school at 6:30.


d. My mother go to work at 6:30 am
and she takes me to school.


e. I has lunch at school with my
friends.


<b>4 . Consolidation</b>: ( 2’)


-Ss do exercises on the board.
<b>5. Appreciation and Homework</b>: (2’)


-Ss learn the lesson at home.
-Prepare Unit 1 (A1-A3).


………
………
………
………


………


____________o0o____________



Preparation:18/08/2010




Teaching :24/08/2010

<b>Period 02.</b>



<i><b>UNIT :1</b></i>

BACK TO SCHOOL


<b>Lesson : 1 (A 1.3 ) </b>



<b>I . Aims:</b>


1. Objectives. By the end of this lesson ss will be able to review the target items that
they learned and review how to introduce and greet others.


<b> </b>2. Skill: 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparations : </b>


1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . Procedures</b>
<b>1. Organization:</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson:</b> ( 5’)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T & SS’ Activities The Contents Time


- introduces words


- guides


- practise


- pictures, orally


- listening to the tape, choral &
individual repetition


- eliciting, modelling
- orally, individually
- in chorus


- writtenly on the board
- recording


- practise ask & answer inpair
- corrects


- poster, handouts


- orally, in pair and in chorus


- play roles
- listen & record


<b>1. Warm up</b> :


- Slap the board: name, meet,
student, class, classmate.





<b>2 . Presentation</b> :


- Presentation Dialogue: A1- 3 (p. 10,12)
- Model Sentences :


Nice to see/ meet you.


I’m in class (7A).
So am I/ I am, too.
How are you?
- Comprehension questions : P.11
Answer Key: a/ Her name is Hoa.
- b/ She is in


class 7A.


- c/ Nam is also
in class 7A.


<b>3 . Practice :</b>-Example exchage:
P1: Good( morning). My name’s (Hoa).
P2: Nice to( meet) you,( Hoa). My
name’s( Nam).


Are you a new student?
P1: Yes. I’m in class (7A).
P2: Oh, so am I





5’


10’


(20’)


<b>4 . Consolidation : </b> (3’)


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation and Home Work : (2</b>’<b>)</b>


- Get ss to practise these dialogues at home and remind these grammar points.
- Prepare for next lesson.


………


…………


………
………
………
………


____________o0o____________


Preparation: 20/08/2010




Teaching : 25/08/2010

<b>Period 03.</b>



<i><b>UNIT :1</b></i>

<b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b>



name


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

<b>Lesson 2: (A 2 ) </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES :</b>


1. Objectives. By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read for details and revise
simple present, comparisons, a lot of / many.


<b> </b>2. Skill: reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparations :</b>


1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do some exercises in workbook
- T checks and gives marks.



<b>3. New lesson:</b>


<b>T& SS ACTIVITIES</b> <b>CONTENTS</b> <b>T</b>


- Tsticks the poster


- Ss do the exercise in pair
- repetition


- uses picture to introduce
- guides


- explains


- synonym, visual aids
- antonym, visual aids
- individually and orally
- cleans & ask ss read
- ss guess


- Ss listen to the tape, repeat, read
silently & compare


- answer, compare with their friends
- writtenly on the board


- corrects


- practise in pair


- listen & record


<b>1. Warm up : </b>


- Question & answer drill:


What class are you in?
Are you a new student?
Who is/ are in class 7A?


<b>2. Pre.reading :</b>


- Pre teach:
+ Still : vÉn


+ lots of = a lot of : nhiÒu
+ many : nhiÒu


+ unhappy ( adj ) : kh«ng vui
+ ( to ) miss : nhí


+ different ( adj ) : kh¸c nhau
- Rub out & remember:


- Open Prediction:
Hoa from?


staying with?
a lot of friends?



happy(unhappy). Why?
- Presentation text: A2 .P11.


<b>3 . While reading :</b>


 Comprehension Questions :
Answer Key:


a/ She is from Hue.


b/ She is staying with her uncle and aunt.
c/ No, she doesn’t have any friends in Ha
Noi


d/ Her new school is bigger than her old
school.


e/ She is unhappy because she misses her
parents and her friends.


3’


13’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

 T/ F statements
- Hoa is from Hue


- She lives with her parents in HN
- she has a lot of friends in HN


- she misses her friends in Hue
- she is happy now.


<b>4 . Post reading :</b>


- Practise ask & answer about Hoa


7’


<b>4. Consolidation: ( 1</b>’<b> )</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Home Work : ( 1</b>’<b> )</b>


- Aks ss to learn vocab.,read & answer again, remind ‘remember’ P. 14


- Gets ss to practise these dialogues at home and remind these grammar points.
- Prepare for next lesson.


………
………
………
………


………


____________o0o____________


Preparation: 22/08/2010




Teaching :

/08/2010

<b>Period 04.</b>



<i><b> Unit:1</b></i>

BACK TO SCHOOL


<b> Lesson 3: </b>

<b>(A4-5)</b>



<b> I . The Aims:</b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask & answer about personal
information.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and writing skills development
3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparations :</b>


1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . Procedures:</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do some exercises in workbook
- T checks and gives marks.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>



T&SS’ ACTIVITIES Time CONTENTS


1. <i>Activity 1:</i>


- T asks ss to look at sentences
in A4.p12


- T elicits and models


8’ I. Presentation.


1. presentation A4. p12


- How are you today? - just fine
( <i>dùng để hỏi về sức khoẻ</i> )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

- SS listen and repeat.


2. <i>Activity 2: </i>


- SS listen to the tape and fill in
the missing words in the dialogues
in A4.p12-13


- SS practice speaking the
dialogues.


3. Activity 3:


- ss will hear 4 conversations


describing the pictures but
they are not in order. Ss
listen to them and make the
number in good order as
conversation in the tape in
A5.p13


<i>4. Activity 4: </i>


- SS practice speaking these
dialogues in pairs without
looking at the books.


<b> 23</b>


<b> 7</b>


- How is every thing? - pretty
good.


( <i>dùng để hỏi tình hình của ai đó sau 1 tg </i>
<i>lkhông gặp nhau</i> )


- How about you? - Ok
II. Practice.


1. Listening and complete these
dialogues.


a. Mr.Tan; Hello, Lien ( <i>how are you</i>? )


Miss Lien: Pretty good, thank you.
( <i>how about you </i>), Tan.


Mr,Tan: ( <i>Not bad </i>), but I am very
busy.


Miss Lien: ( <i>Me, too</i> )


b. Nam: Good afternoon, Nga. ( <i>How is</i>
<i>everything? </i>)


Nga: ( <i> Ok, </i>) thanks. ( <i> how are you </i>
<i>today </i> ), Nam?


Nam: ( <i> just fine, </i>) thanks.


Nga: I’m going to the lunch room.
Nam: Yes. ( <i>so am I </i>)


<b>2</b>. Listening A5.p13
Answer key


1 - c 2 – b 3 – d 4
– a


III. Production


 Roleplay.



- practice these dialogues.


<b>4. Consolidation: ( 1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Aks ss to learn vocab.,read & answer again, remind ‘remember’ P. 14


- Gets ss to practise these dialogues at home and remind these grammar points.
- Prepare for next lesson.


………
………
………


……….


………
………
………
………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

Preparation: 25/08/2010



Teaching :

/08/2010

<b>Period 05.</b>



<i><b> Unit:1</b></i>

BACK TO SCHOOL


<b> Lesson 4: </b>

<b>(B 1-3 )</b>



<b> I . The Aims:</b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask & answer about personal
information ( names, age, address.)


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparations :</b>


1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . Procedures:</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do some exercises in workbook
- T checks and gives marks.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T & SS’ ACTIVITIES <b>CONTENTS</b> <b>TIME</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1</b><b> : </b></i>



- draws, asks Ss to choose &
answer


Ss: do them in group


T : corrects & gives remarks


<i><b>2. Activity2.</b></i>


- visual aids, orally
- in chorus, individually
- eliciting


- writtenly on the board


T:gives the pictures& guides,
models


-practise in pair and writtenly
T :corrects


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


Ss :ask & answer in pair
T :monitors & corrects
Ss:fill in the survey


<b>I. Warm Up : </b>



-Noughts & Grosses:


1 2 3


4 5 6


7 8 9




1. Where do you live?
2. How old are you?


3.What’syour family name?
4. Are you a new student?
5. What class are you in?
6. How are you?


7. What’s your name?
8. lucky number


9. Are you in class 7A?


<b>II. Preteach:</b>


1. Vocab:


- family name (n): họ tên
- middle name (n): tên đệm
- an address (n): địa chỉ


- (to) talk : nói chuyện
- Parents (n): bố mẹ
* Check by Slap the board


2. Presentation:


- Presentation dialogue: B1. P15
+ how old is he?


+ where does he live?


5’


10’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

<b>III . Practice :</b>


1. comprehension questions
A=> D, P15


2. Word cue drill


Nam Hoa Minh
Nguyen Pham Tran
15 12 13
32 Nguyen Du Da Nang Tran Hung Dao
3. B2.P16


<b>IV. Production</b>



1. B3.P16


- ask ss’ partner questions and fill in the
form.


7’


<b> 4. Consolidation: ( 1 )</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Aks ss to learn vocab.,read & answer again, remind ‘remember’ P. 14


- Gets ss to practise these dialogues at home and remind these grammar points.
- Prepare for next lesson.


………
………


……….


………
………
………


<b> --- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>



---Preparation: 26/08/2010



Teaching :

. /09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 06</b>



<i><b>Unit:1</b></i>

<b>BACK TO SCHOOL</b>



<b>Lesson: 5 (B4 - 7)</b>


<b> </b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to use “How far” questions and
answers with “kilometers / meters” to talk about the distances.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

- T checks and gives marks.


<b>3. New lesson:</b>


T & SS’ ACTIVITIES <b>Time</b> <b>CONTENTS</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i>


Teacher asks Ss to come to the
bb to find out the


“WH-questions” they’ve learnt


 why, when.


 Who, how


 What, where.


<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


* Vocab


- T elicits and models
- SS listen and repeat
- SS copy down


* T checks by Rub out and
remember.



* Presentation Dialogue:
B4.p16


- T presents B4.p16 and gives
model sentences.


<i><b>3. Activity3.</b></i>


- SS practice speaking B5.p17
- Example Exchange


S1: How far is it from your
house to school?


S2: It’s about one kilometer.
- SS practice speaking the
dialogue B4.p16 in pairs.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4:</b></i>


- Ss walk around the class to ask
and answer to fill in this form.


4’


13’


15’


5’



I. <b>Warm up:</b>


 Wordsquare


w w w h y
h w h e n
e b a o n
r y t o n
e f r o m
II. <b>Presentation:</b>


1. Preteach:


- How far: Bao xa
- Bus-stop: (n) bÕn xe buýt
- Post office: (n) Bu ®iƯn


- Movie theater: (n) R¹p chiÕu phim
- How: bằng phơng tiện gì


2. Model sentences:


* How do you go to school?
- I go to school by bike.


* How far is it from your house to school?
- It’s about two kilometers.





 <b>How + do/does + S + V ?</b>


 <b>S + V + N + by mean of </b>
<b>transports</b>


 <b>How far is it from + N1 + to + </b>


<b>N2 ?</b>


 It’s<b> about + kilometers</b>


III.<b> Practice:</b>


1. Word cue Drill. B5.p17
- the market / 2kms


- the post office / 700 ms
- school / 1km


- the movie theater / 3kms
- the bus-stop / 500 ms


2. Pair work.
- B4.p16
IV. <b>Production:</b>


B7.p18



Name………..


Address………


Means of transport:………..
Distance:……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: words and how to ask and answer about distance
- Do exercises in worbook.


- Prepare : Unit 2: A1 - A2 - A3


………
………
………


……….


………
………


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 28/08/2010




Teaching :

./09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 07</b>



<i><b>Unit:2</b></i>

<b>:</b>

<b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson: 1 (A1-3)</b>


<b> </b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask for and give telephone
numbers and further practice in address.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do some exercises in workbook


- ss make 2 sentences:


+ How / far / it / is / your house / from / to /school ?


+ How / far / it / is / your school / from / to /the post office?
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. New lesson:</b>


T and ss’ activities <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i><b>.</b>


T. asks ss to tell some information
about a friend


- 1 student says
- T. gives mark for ss


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


4’


10’


<b>I - Warm up</b>


- Good morning!



<b>II - Presentation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

- ss lidten and repeat
- ss copy down


- T checks by Rub out & Remember.
- T. presents the text A3 on p20.


- T. asks ss to give the model sentence.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T. asks ss to practice reading the
telephone numbers


- ss practice in a role:
+ T – whole class
+ Half – half


+ Open pairs & close pairs


- T. asks ss to listen then write the
telephone numbers


- ss listen and write. Then compare
exchange the answers


- Ask ss to listen again and T. checks
- Let ss listen the last time to correct


the answers


- T. gives the correct answers


- T. asks ss to listen to the dialogue
again then practice in pairs.


- T. calls some pairs to read the
dialogue before the class


- Then T. asks ss to copy the grid in the
book, and ss work in groups to
complete it


- Ss practice
<i><b>4.Activity 4.</b></i>


- T. asks ss to use the gird to tell their
own friends


- Ss work individually to write in their
notebooks


18’


5’


- Telephone directory (n): danh b¹ tho¹i
- Call (v): Gäi ®iÖn



- Will (v): sÏ Ex: I will call you
- Telephone number (n): số điện thoại
2. Model sentence


Asking about the telephone numbers
Ex: What’s your telephone numbers
8, 237. 721


- The way to read telephone numbers?
Ex: 8. 531.701


( eight/ five three one/ seven one )


Note: Khi đọc, ngắt sau số mã khu vực và
sau mỗi sau mỗi 3 số ( nh khi viết )


+ “ 88 ”: eight eight – double eight
ex: 800, 222, 000, 111


<b>III. Practice</b>


1. Word cue Drill.
- Van An / 7345610
- Thanh Ba / 5267117
- Anh Tuan / 853793
- Bui Bang / 8237041
- Xuan Ba / 6351793
- Thi Bang / 9259288


2. A2: Listen and write the telephone


numbers


Answer Key
a. 8 251 654


d. 8 351 793
b. 8 250 514
e. 8 237 041
c. 8 251 936
f. 7 821 652
3. A3: Listen


1. Do you often talk with someone on the
telephone?


2. Do you know the question asking for
telephone numbers?


3. Do you know how to give your
telephone number to other?


<b>IV. Production</b>


<b>* Write it up.</b>


Ex: Her name’s Hoa. She lives at 12 THD
street.Her telephone number is
018.824.867


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

- Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare : Unit 2: A4-5


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 02/09/2010



Teaching :

/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 08</b>




<i><b>Unit:2</b></i>

<b>:</b>

<b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson: 2 (A4-5)</b>


<b> </b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to use the “future
– <i>will</i>” and positive statements and “WH” questions to talk about sure events in the
future.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and reading and writing skills development
3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and answer T’s questions about
telephone number, name and address.


- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. New lesson:</b>


<b>activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i><b>.</b>


- T elicits and models
- ss lidten and repeat
- ss copy down


- T checks by Rub out & Remember.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T. presents the text A4 on p21.
- T. asks ss to give the model sentence
about the future.


- T does the concept-check.


+ Form, Use, meaning &
Intonation.


15’ <b>I - Presentation</b>


1. New words
- (to) meet : gặp
- see (v): nhìn, xem
- free (adv): rảnh rỗi
- (to) start : bắt đầu


- Theater (n): nhà hát
2. Presentation


<b>Model sentences</b>


Where will you meet?


We will meet in front of the movie theater.


 <b>Form</b>: S + will + V(infi) + N


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

- T gives some more examples


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking in
a role:


+ T – whole class
+ half – half


+ open and close pairs.


- T asks ss to read the dialogue
in A4.P21 and answer the
questions below by giving
short answer only.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>



- T asks ss to listen to the T’s reading
and fill in the missing word in
A5.P21


17’


5’


trong t¬ng lai.


<b>Examples:</b>


+ I Will see you tomorrow


+ We will meet in front of the movie
theater


+ It will start at 7 o’clock


<b>II.Practice.</b>


1. Word cue drill.


- where / meet? / in the street
- what time / meet? / at 7:00
- what / see? / a film


- how / go? / by bike
Example Exchange:



S1: where will we meet?
S2: we will meet in the street.


2. Compresension questions: A4.P21
Answer key


a. Phong and Tam
b. See a movie
c. At 6:45


d. In front of the movie theater.


<b>III. Production.</b>


*Listening: A5.P21
Answer key
a. 8 545 545


b. A movie
c. My house
d. A bus


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: vocabulary and new target items



- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare : Unit 2: A6-7


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 03/09/2010



Teaching :

./09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 09</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

<b>Lesson: 3 (A6-7)</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to make a phone
call or answer the phone and more practice with telephone number.



<b> </b>2. Skills : Speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with future tense
+ what time / we / meet? / at 6:30


+ where / we / meet? / in front of the post office.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. New lesson:</b>


<b>activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models
- ss lidten and repeat
- ss copy down



- T checks by Slap the board.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T. presents the text A4 on p21.
- T. gives some expressions when
calling or answering telephone.


- T gives some more examples


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking
A6.P22 in a role:


+ T – whole class
+ half – half


+ open and close pairs.


- T asks ss to read the dialogue in
A6.P22 and answer the questions
below by giving short answer only.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


-T asks ss to practice speaking
A7.P23 to improve their


15’



15’


7’


<b>I - Presentation</b>


1. New words


- (to) speak = tell : nãi chun.


- the moment (adv): lóc nµy, bây giờ
- again : lặp lại, gọi lại


- (to) be back : quay lại
- when : khi nào


- call = phone (v): gäi ®iƯn
2. Presentation. A6.P22


<b>Some Expressions</b>


- who is calling?


- Can / could I speak to …?
- To be out


- I’ll call again.


<b>Examples:</b>



+ Hello. This is …..


+ This is ... who is calling?
+ can I speak to ….


<b>II.Practice.</b>


1. Speaking the dialogue.


2. Compresension questions: A6.P21
Answer key


 Phong


 Han


 Lan


 About six o’clock.


 After 6.


<b>III. Production.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

pronunciation. Future simple tense


<b> </b>


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: vocabulary and some expressions and “Remember”.P23
- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense


- Prepare : Unit 2: B1-3,9


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 06/09/2010



Teaching :

/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 10</b>



<i><b>Unit:2</b></i>

<b>:</b>

<b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson: 4 B1,2,3,9.P24-28</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives. By the end of the lesson ss will be able to talk and write about dates of
the year and pronunciation.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Speaking and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- Put (v) in the box for a correct sentences


(x) for an incorrect one
1. A: She will be here 


B: She will here 


2. A. Will she come here? 


B. Will she comes here? 



- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. New lesson:</b>


<b>T & ss</b>’<b> activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i><b>.</b>


- T elicits and models
- ss lidten and repeat


10’ <b>I - Presentation</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- ss copy down


- T checks by Rub out and
remember.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2</b></i><b>.</b>


- T. asks ss to look at the book and
listen then repeat


- T. notices: The writing and spelling
( pronoun of some ordinal numbers)
Ex: First, second third, fifth, with
twentieth and the end of “th”


- Lets ss read ordinal numbers


silently


- Then T. calls some ss to read before
the class


- T. correct pron’s mistakes
- Then T can write some dates
- Let ss do individually


- Ss write the names of the months in
order from first to twelfth


- Then compare with their partners
- Then T and ss corrects and read the
months


- T. asks some ss to read again
- T. asks ss to work in groups


- T. gives 2 groups flashcards on
which T wrote the months (in
Vietnamese) and on that ones T.
wrote in English


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to walk around the class
to ask & answer about the birthday.


22’



5’


- third: ngµy mïng ba
- twelfth: ngµy mêi hai
- twentieth: ngµy hai mơi
- twenty-first: ngày hai mốt
- thirtieth: ngày ba mơi
- thirty-first: angry ba mèt.
* Rubout and Remember.
<i><b>2. Presentation B1</b></i>


* Guess the new words.


<b>II. Practice</b>


<i><b>1.</b></i>


<i><b> </b><b> B1: Listen and repeat</b></i>


a. Matching:


January Th¸ng 10
February Th¸ng 7
March Th¸ng 5
April Th¸ng 12
May Th¸ng 1
June Th¸ng 4
July Th¸ng 9
August Th¸ng 2


September Th¸ng 6
October Th¸ng 11
November Th¸ng 3
December Th¸ng 8
2. <i><b>B2: Listen and write the dates</b></i>


Answer
- The first of July (1st<sub> July)</sub>


- The nineteenth (19th<sub>)</sub>


- The Sixth (6th<sub>)</sub>


- The fourteenth (14th<sub>)</sub>


- The seventeenth (17th<sub>)</sub>


- The third-first (31th<sub>)</sub>




3. <i><b>B3: Write the months in order</b></i>
<i><b>from first to twelfth</b></i>


<b>III. Production</b>




 Survey:



Name Birthday


Thao July 19th


- Example Exchange:
S1: When is your birthday?
S2: July 19th<sub>.</sub>




* B9.P28


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: vocabulary


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson : Unit 2: B 4-5.


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 10/09/2010



Teaching :

./09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 11</b>



<i><b>Unit:2</b></i>

<b>:</b>

<b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson: 4 B4-5.P25-26</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review future simple and know how to use
some adjectives: nervous, happy, and preposition of time.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T & ss activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1</b></i><b>.</b>


- T elicits and models
- ss lidten and repeat
- ss copy down


- T checks by “ Slap the board ”
<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i><b>.</b>


- T. asks ss to look at the book and
fill in this form.


12’ <b>I - Preteach</b>


<i><b> 1. Vocabulary</b></i><b>: </b>


- Date of birth = birthday: ngày sinh
- (to) worry : lo lắng
- nervous (adj) : lo sợ
- won’t = will not : sẽ
- address (n) : địa chỉ
* “ Slap the board ”


<i><b>2.</b></i>


<i><b> </b><b> B5.P2: Complete the form</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to listen to the Teacher
and check their form.


- T. asks ss to read the dialogue again
to answer these questions in B4.P25


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to write about them selves
using these guides.


20’


5’


<b>II. Practice</b>


1. Listen.B4.P25


Answer key
Name: Pham Thi Hoa


Date of birth: June Eight


Address: 12 Tran Hung Dao street.
Tel No: 8 262 019



2. Comprehension question.
* B4.P25 a => e.


<b>III. Production</b>




 Write it up.


- ss write about them selves


+ how old will you be on your next
birthday?


+ who do you live with?
+ what is your address?


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: vocabulary


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson : Unit 2: B 6-8


……….



………
………


………


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Date of Preparation: 11/09/2010



Date of Teaching:

/09/2010

<b> </b>

<b>Period 12</b>



<i><b>Unit:2</b></i>

<b>:</b>

<b>PERSONAL INFORMATION</b>



<b>Lesson: 5 B6-8.P26-27</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review future simple and know how to use
days, months, years.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook



<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T & ss</b>’<b> activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b>1. Activity 1.</b>


- T devides the class into 2
teams.


- T lets ss play game
“ Lucky Number”


<b>2. Activity 2.</b>


- T elicits and models
- Ss copy down


- Ss listen and repeat.


T checks by “ Rub out and remember”
- T presents and models Text B6.P26


<b>3. Activity 3.</b>



- T asks ss to read the text
B6.p26 to answer these
questions.


- T asks ss to complete the
invitation card using the
information from the answer.
- T asks ss to answer the


questions in full sentences
B7.P27 and join them to form a
paragraph.


5’


10’


17’


5’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>


* Lucky number.
1. what’s your name?
2. How old are you?
3. Lucky number


4. What’s your address?


5. Lucky number


6. What’s your telephone number?
7. What’s your date of birth?
8. Lucky number


9. Who do you live with?
10 Lucky number


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


1. Preteach.


- (to) have a party:
- (to) invite:


- An invitation card:
- Friends:


- A party:
- (to) finish:
2. Presentation Text.


 B6.P26


<b>III. Practice</b>.


<b>1.</b> Comprehension questions.
a. How old is Lan now ?
b. When is her birthday ?



c. Where will her birthday party
be ?


d. What’s her address ?


e. How long will the party last ?
2. Gap – fill.


* B6.P27


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<b>4. Activity 4.</b>


- ss write an invitation to their
birthday party using the form in
B6.P27


<b>IV. Production</b>


 B8.P 27. Writing.
Example:


I am having a party …………..


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- Learn by heart: vocabulary


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
………
………


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 12/09/2010



Teaching :

/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 13. </b>

<b>Revision</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review future simple: “will” and some
model sentences.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.



<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.P27
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


T and SS’ Activities Time Contents


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T retells ss the use and form
of the simple future.


- T lets ss copy down these
form in their notebook.
- T elicits one by one model


sentence


- Lets ss copy down these
model sentences



- T asks ss to give some
examples for each model
sentence.


<b>12</b> <b>I. Presentation</b>.


1. Simple future: “will”


(+) S + will + V(infi) + N .


(<b>- </b>) S + will not / Won’t + V(infi) + N .
(? ) Will + S + V(infi) + N ..?


2. Model sentences
a. What:


- What’s your name ?
address ?


telephone number ?
family name ?
b. Where:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T asks ss to open their
notebook to do these
exercises using these
structures and model


sentences above.
3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- T lets ss play game “ Noughts
and Crosses”


<b>18</b>


<b>7</b>


c. How far:


- How far is it from your house to
school ?


d. How:


- How old are you ?
- How old is He ?


- How do you go to school ?


<b>II. Practice</b>.


1. Introduce the people in the pictures in
Exercise 2.P3 in workbook.


2. Complete the conversations in Exercise
1.P5 and Exercise 3.P6 and Exercise
5.P7



3. Complete the sentences in Exercise
1.P8 and Exercise 3.P9 and Exercise
3-4.P11


<b>III. Production</b>.


 Noughts and crosses.
a.


EX3 EX3b. EX3c.
d.


EX3 EX4a. EX4b.
c.


EX4 EX4d. EX4e.


<b> 4. Consolidation ( 1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson :



……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 16/09/2010



Teaching :

/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 14 </b>



<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1 - 3. what a lovely home.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to describe the room of the
house with structure: “ It has …” and an exclaimation: “ what + N …!”


<b> </b>2. Skills : writing skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models
- Ss listen and repeat in


chorus and individually.
- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “ Slap the
board”


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T sets the scene


- T elicits A1.P29 and ask ss
to give some model


sentences


- T sets the scene A3.P31 and
elicits & models A3.


- SS look at the pictures on
P31 to give examples
- T does the concept-check.
- SS listen and copy down.
3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- T asks ss to practice


speaking in the role of Lan
& Hoa in A1.P29


- T asks ss to work in group
of 4 to look at other clothes
to make exclaimation.
- SS look at pictures in


A3.P31 to describe some
things.


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.



- T asks ss to look at the pictures
in A2.P30-31 to write


<b>12</b>


<b>17</b>


<b>8</b>


<b>I. Presentation</b>.
1. Vocabulary.


- awful: (adj) khñng khiÕp
- comfortable: (adj) thoải mái
- Tub: (n) bån t¾m


- shower: (n) vòi tắm hoa sen
- dryer: (n) m¸y sÊy


- sink : (n) bån rưa
- refrigerator: (n) tđ l¹nh
2. Presentation: Model sentences
a. Exclaimations


- Form: what + a/an + adj + N!
Example: what a bright room!
b. Is there a …/ Are there any …
Example: Is there a TV in your
room?



Yes, there is.


- Form: Is there a … / Are there any


… ?


Yes, there is / there are
No, there isn’t / there aren’t


<b>II. Practice</b>.


1. Pair work. A1.P29
2. Group work. A2.P30


- what an expensive dress !
- what a beautiful skirt !
3. Ask and Answer.


- Eg. Is there a window in the room ?
Yes, there is. Where is it ?


It is behind the TV.


<b>III. Production</b>.
a. Writing.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Exclaimations in their notebook. <sub>-</sub> <sub>Write a complaint.</sub>



<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….

Preparation: 17/09/2010



Teaching : 22/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 15 </b>



<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2. what a lovely home.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:



- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to make a complaint with
structure: “ what + a / an + adj + N …!” and compliments


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> (1’)


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> </b> ( 5’ )


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


T and SS’ Activities Time Contents


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models
- Ss listen and repeat in



chorus and individually.
- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “ Rub out and
remember ”


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T uses the pictures on P30
to set the scene and elicit
the model sentences.
- T gives Use, Form.


<b>12</b> <b>I. Presentation</b>.
1. Vocabulary.


- Expensive: (adj) đắt
- boring: (adj) buồn tẻ


- bad: > < good: (adj) xÊu > < tèt


- wet: > < dry (adj) Èm ít > < kh« hanh
- bright: (adj) s¸ng


- delicious : (adj) ngon miệng
- beautiful: (adj) xinh đẹp
2. Presentation:



<b>* Model sentences</b>


a. Exclaimations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- SS listen and copy down.
3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- T asks ss to practice


speaking compliments and
complaints in a role:


- T & whole class
- Half & half


- Open & close pairs.


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.


- T lets ss play game by giving
compliments and making
complaints with structure
“ what + a / an + adj + N …!”


<b>18</b>


<b>7</b>





<b>II. Practice.</b>


1. Word cue drill.
- dress / expensive
- restaurant / awful
- day / wet


- bright / room
- house / lovely
- day / beuatiful.
Examples:


- S1. The dress is expensive


- S2. Yes, what an expensive dress !


<b>III. Production</b>.


a. Noughts and crosses.


Dinner movie restaurant
boy shirt room
girl house Party.


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1)</b>



- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with future tense
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>--- </b><b> THE END </b><b></b>


---Preparation: 18/09/2010



Teaching : 25/09/2010

<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>Unit 3: at home</b>




<b>Lesson 3. B1-2. </b>

Hoa’s

<b> family.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to ask and answer about
occupation using this structure: “ what + do/does + S + do/work ?”.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make some exclaimation.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


T and SS’ Activities Time Contents



<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models
- Ss listen and repeat in


chorus and individually.
- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “ Rub out and
remember ”


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T sets the scene B1-2
- T elicits and models.
- T does the concept-check.
- SS listen and copy down.
- T asks ss to read these


sentences and predict
which


sentences are T and which
ones are F.


- SS compare it in pair
- T gets feedback.



3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


<b>15</b>


<b>17</b>


<b>I. Presentation</b>.
1. Vocabulary.


- (to) Raise: chăn nu«i
- (to) take care of: chăm sóc
- cattle (n): gia sóc


- a journalist (n): nhà báo
- a newspaper (n) tê b¸o
- a farmer (n) : nông dân
- a Doctor: b¸c sÜ


2. Presentation:


<b>* Model sentences</b>


a. Ask about occupation:


<i><b> - Form: what + do/does + S + do/work?</b></i>




Example: what does her father do?
3. T/F statements Prediction


a. Hoa’s father is a worker


b. her mother does the housework and
helps on the farm.


c. her sister is 10


d. Lan’s father takes care of sick children.
e. Her mother is a doctor.


f. her brother works on the farm.


<b>Answer key</b>.


a. F b. T c. F d. T e. F f. F


<b>II. Practice.</b>


1. Comprehension questions.
* B1-2.P33-34


Answer key.
a. He is a farmer.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

- T asks ss to read the text
and answer these questions
in


B1-2.P33,34 and these


sentences.


g. what does Lan’s father do ?
h. Does her mother teach in a
school ?


i. What is her mother’s job ?
- T checks by having ss


played game “ noughts and
crosses”


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.


- T asks ss to walk around
the class to ask and answer
about their family’s


members using these
questions.


a. How old is your
father?


b. What does he do ?
c. Where does he work ?


<b>5</b>


c. She is a housewife.



d. She does the housework and helps
on the farm


e. Yes, they are.
f. She is 8.


2. Noughts and crosses


a b c


d e f


g h i


<b>III. Production</b>.


 Survey


Members Age Job Place of work
1. Father


2. Mother
3. Brother
4. Sister.


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with occupations
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
………
………
………
………
………
………


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 20/09/2010



Teaching : 27/09/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 17 </b>



<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:



- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen for personal information and know
how to describe some jobs.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5)</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with “ what +
do/does + S + do/work?


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T lets ss play game
- “ Pelmanism ”



- Ss play game by matching
these words or phrases in
pairs.


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “what and where”
- T asks ss to look at this table


and predict the information
to fill in this table.


- T gets feedback.


3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- SS listen to the T and check
their predictions


- SS compare it in pairs.



<b>7</b>


<b>8</b>


<b>17</b>


<b>I. Warm up.</b>


1. <i><b>Pelmanism</b></i>. <i><b>B3.P35</b></i>


<b>A farmer</b> <b>A doctor</b> <b>A </b>


<b>journalist</b> <b>A teacher</b>
<b>Writes for</b>


<b>a </b>


<b>newspaper</b>


<b>Take </b>
<b>care of </b>
<b>sick </b>
<b>people</b>


<b>Teaches in </b>
<b>a school</b>


<b>Works on </b>
<b>a farm.</b>



<b>II. Pre-listening.</b>


1. Preteach.


- a high school: trêng cÊp 3.
- a magazine: tạp chí


- a nurse: Y tá


- a hospital: bệnh viÖn
2. Open prediction.


Name age job Place of work
Tom


Susan
Bill


<b>III. While-listening.</b>


 <b>Grid and form.</b>
<b>Answer key.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

Adjecti
ve
- T gets feedback.


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.


- T asks ss to write about Tom,


Susan, Bill using the


information in the table.


<b>5</b> TomSusan 2619 TeacherJournalist High schoolFor a magazine
Bill 20 Nurse Hospital.


<b>IV. Post-listening</b>


 Write it up
Example:


Tom is 26 years old. He is a teacher. He
teaches in a high school...


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with occupations
- Prepare for next lesson :


Preparation: 25/09/2010



Teaching : 01/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 18 </b>



<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



<b>Lesson 5. b5.p36</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review comparative and superative of
irregular adjective and long adjective


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1</b>’<b>)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5</b>’<b> )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with “ what +
do/does + S + do/work?



- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’ <b>Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T asks ss to come to the
blackboard to write as many
adj as they can.


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


<b>2</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>


good
expensive


<b> </b>hot


<b> </b>small


long <b> </b>big



<b> </b>tall


<b> </b>cheap


<b> </b>beautiful


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Rub out and
remember”


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>.


- T sets the scene and elicits &
models B5.P35 – 36


- T asks ss to give model
sentences.


- T presents and does the
concept-check.



+ Form.
+ Use


+ Meaning & Intonation.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>.


- SS practice speaking in a
role.


+ T – whole class
+ Half – half


+ Open & close pairs.


- SS read the text and answer
the question a – d on P.36


<i><b>5. Activity 5.</b></i>


- SS write sentences using the
pictures that they’ve practised


<b>13</b>’


<b>5</b>’


- An apartment = a flat: căn hộ
- Suitable : phù hợp



- Furnished : đầy đủ tiện nghi
- Cheap : rẻ


- Difficult : khó khăn


- Easy > < hard : dễ dàng > < Khã nhäc
2. Presentation Dialogue. B5.P35 – 36


Model sentences.


- the apartment at number 40 is better. It’s
more expensive


- the apartment at number 79 is the best.
It’s the most expensive.


3. Forms:


 Comparatives:
+ <i><b>Short adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + short adj + ER + than + S2</b></i>.
+ <i><b>Long adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + MORE + long adj + than + S2</b></i>
 Superlatives:


+ <i><b>Short adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + the + short adj + EST + </b></i>



+ + <i><b>Long adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + THE MOST + long adj + </b></i>


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>a.Word cue drill.</b>


- Language focus 1.P39 - 40.


- Example: A is a cheap toy and B is
cheaper but C is the cheapest.


<b> b. Comprehension questions. B5.P36</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


a. Write it up
Example:


Sydney is bigger than Australia ...


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>



- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with comparatives and superlatives
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
………
………


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 27/09/2010



Teaching : 04/10/2010

<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

<b>Language focus 1.</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review comparative and superative and
more practice in present simple, future “ will ”.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.


2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with comparative
and superlatives.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models


- T explains and gives model
sentences


- Practice doing EX1.P38


- T retells the form of future
simple tense.


- T asks ss to do EX2.P38
- T retells the form of



comparatives & superlatives.
- SS do EX5.P39


- T asks ss to retell model
sentences to ask and answer
about Jobs.


- SS do EX6.P40


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


<b>18</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Present simple.</b>


 “Tobe”


- <i><b>S + tobe + (a/an) + N.</b></i>


- Example: <i>I am a student</i>.


 “Verbs”


- <i><b>S + V(es,s) + N ...</b></i>



- Example: <i>He goes to school by bike</i>.


<b>2. Future simple tense. </b>


- Form: <i><b>S + will + V(infi) + N ...</b></i>


- Example: <i>My class will go to Ha Noi </i>
<i>next summer.</i>


<b>3. Comparatives: </b>


 Comparatives:
+ <i><b>Short adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + short adj + ER + than + S2</b></i>.
+ <i><b>Long adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + MORE + long adj + than + S2</b></i>
 Superlatives:


+ <i><b>Short adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + the + short adj + EST + </b></i>


+ <i><b>Long adj</b></i>:


<i><b>S1 + tobe + THE MOST + long adj + </b></i>





<b>4. Prepositions</b>:


- on, in front of, behind, next to,
under...




<b>4. Occupations and ordinal numbers.</b>
<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>a.Word cue drill.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

- T asks ss to do exercises
from 1 to 8. P 38 – 41.
3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


T lets ss play game


“ noughts and Crosses ” by
writing sentences about Nam
will do or won’t do tomorrow.


<b>5</b> <b>IV. Production.</b> Noughts and crosses.
Go / post


officev Call / Ba


x <sub>Read / book</sub>v


Tidy / yardx See / moviev Watch / TVx


Meet /


Minhv


Write / grand
motherx


Do /
homeworkv


<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS do exercises in work book and make sentences with comparatives and superlatives
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
………


……….


………
………
………


………


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/10/2010



Teaching : 06/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 20 </b>



<b>The written test 45</b>



<b>I.</b> The aims.


- To help ss to systematize the content from unit 1 to unit 3 and review grammar:
+ Present simple tense


+ future simple tense.


+ comparatives and superlatives
+ ordinal number and occupations...
II. The content


<b>1. Questions.</b>


<i><b>1. Question 1. circle the best answer.</b></i>


1. How old ... You ?


a. are b. is c. am



2. ... Is it from your house to school ?


a. how often b. how far c. how long
3. My new school is … my old school.


a. bigger b. biger c. bigger than
4. … Is your birthday ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

5. what … your telephone number ?


a. do b. is c. are


<i><b>2. Question 2. put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.</b></i>


1. Lan ( play ) Video games every day.
2. what ( be ) your job ?


3. we will ( go ) fishing next weekend.
4. Nam and Tuan ( be ) taller than Minh.
5. where ( do ) Hoa live ?


<i><b>3. Question 3. Match the questions in column A with their answers in column B.</b></i>


<b> A </b>B
1. How old are you ? a. I am 14 years old.
2. How far is it from your school to


the post office ? b. He lives in Son Hai – Luc Ngan
3. Where does Nam live ? c. He is a doctor.



4. What is his telephone number ? d. It is about 2 kilometers.
5. What does He do ? e. 8 570 136


<i><b>4. Question 4. write these comparative and superlative sentences.</b></i>


1. Lan cao 1m 30 Huong cao 1m 45
-> Huong is ...


2. Minh đợc 10 điểm Nga đợc 8 điểm Tuấn đợc 6 điểm
-> Minh is …


3. Anh 7 gi¸ 6.800 dong Địa giá 7: 8.000 dong To¸n gi¸ 7: 15.000 dong
-> To¸n is the ...


4. Bµi tËp Toán rất khó Bài tập Tiếng anh còn khó h¬n.
-> English exercises are more ... Math exercises.


5. To¸n: 5000 dong Văn học: 7.000 dong Lịch sử: 9.600 dong
` -> Toán is ...


<b>2. Answer keys and points.</b>


* Question1(2,5p): 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. a 5. b


* Question 2(2,5p): 1. plays 2. is 3. go 4. are 5. does
* Question 3(2,5p): 1. a 2. d 3. b 4. e 5. c
* Question 4 (2,5p): 1. Huong is taller than Lan


2. Minh is the best.



3. To¸n is the most expensive.


4. English exercises are more difficult than Math exercises.
5. Toan is the cheapest.


<b>3. Result and percent</b>


Total of students: …. Total of ss’ writing papers: …
- Excellent: ……… %


- Good: ……….. %
- Fair: ……….. %
- Poor: ………. %
- Fail: ………. %


<b>4. Consolidation</b>


<b> - </b>T comments ss’ attitude and ss’ attention


<b>5. homework.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

……….


………


……….


………



……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/10/2010



Teaching : 08/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 21 </b>



<b>Unit 4 at school</b>



<b>Lesson 1 A 1,2,4.p42-43</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to ask and answer about the time: “to / pass”
and know more new words of subject and talking about the schedule.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with comparative
and superlatives:


+ Lan / tall / 1m 35 + Huong / tall / 1m 50
-> Huong is ………..


+ English book / cost / 8600dong + Math book / cost / 10500dong
-> Math book is ………..


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and </b>SS’Activities <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.



- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Matching”
- T elicits and models


- T explains and gives model
sentences


<b>5</b>


<b>12</b>


<b>I. Vocab. </b>


- Physics: m«n VËt lý


- physical education: m«n ThĨ dơc
- Geography: m«n Địa lý


- Literature: môn Văn học
- Music: môn ¢m nh¹c


<b>* checking by Matching</b>
<b>II. Presentation:</b>


1. A1.P42


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

- T does the concept-check.


- T asks ss to give some
examples.


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T asks ss to look at pictures
in A4.P43


- T elicits and models
- Ss listen and repeat
- Ss practice speaking.
- T does the concept-check.


3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- ss practice in pairs to speak
about the pictures in A4.P43
T lets ss play game


“ noughts and Crosses ” by
answering questions in
A2.P42


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.


- SS walk around the class to ask
and answer and fill in this table.


<b>15</b>



<b>5</b>


- what time is it ?
- It’s half past six.
a. Cách nói giờ chẵn:
- VD 7h, 9h, 4h ...


-> seven o’clock, nine o’clock, four o’clock ...
->


b.C¸ch nói giờ lẻ:


Cách nói giờ trớc phút sau:
- VD: 5h25 = it’s five twenty five.
<b>- </b>


 C¸ch nãi phót tríc giê sau:
* NÕu h¬n: “ dïng Past”


- VD: 4h15 = it’s a quarter past four.
-


<b>* </b>NÕu kÐm: “ dïng To”


- VD: 5h45’ = it’s a quarter to six.
-


2. A4.P43.


Model sentences


- what is Lan studying ?
- she is studying Physics


- what time does she have her physics
class?


- She has her physics class at 8: 40


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>a.Pairworks. </b>


<b>- ss </b>ask and answer about other pictures in
A4.P43.


<b> b. Noughts and crosses.</b>


<b>a</b> <b>b</b> <b>c</b>


<b>d</b> <b>e</b> <b>f</b>


<b>g</b> <b>h</b> <b>i</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


- <b>A2.P42</b>


<b>Survey</b>



<b> 4. Consolidation (1)</b>



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
It’s<b> + sè giê + o clock</b>’ .


It’s<b> + sè phót + past + sè giê.</b>


It’s<b> + sè phót + to + sè giê.</b>


It’s<b> + sè giê + sè phót</b>.


- <b>what + tobe + S + studying ?</b>


- <b>S + tobe + studying + subjects.</b>


- <b>What time + do/does + S + have + </b>
<b>subjects?</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS do exercises in work book and make sentences with comparatives and superlatives
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
………


……….



……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 05/10/2010



Teaching : 11/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 22 </b>



<b>Unit 4 at school</b>



<b>Lesson 2 A 3,5.p43-44</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know more school vocabulary and listen for
details.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and listening skills development



3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and make sentences with these
structures:


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and </b>SS’ Activities <b>Time</b> <b><sub>Contents</sub></b>


<i><b> 1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T asks ss to come to the bb to
write as many subject as they can.
Biology, English, Science,
Geography, Physics, Music.
History


Art, ...



2. Activity 2.


- T elicits and models
- ss listen and repeat


<b>3</b>


<b>9</b>


<b>I. warm up. </b>


H B I O L O G Y A


I E N G L I S H R


M U S I C T


M A T H S C I E N C E


G E O G R A P H Y


L I T E R A T U R E


P H Y S I C S


<b>II. Presentation:</b>
<b> 1. Vocab</b>


- schedule: thêi kho¸ biĨu


- <b>what + tobe + S + studying ?</b>


- <b>S + tobe + studying + subjects.</b>


- <b>What time + do/does + S + have + </b>
<b>subjects?</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by “ Matching”


- T asks ss to predict 5 classes that
Thu has on Thursday and Wednesday.
3. Activity 3.


- T asks ss to listen to the T and
complete the schedule.


- T sets the scence and elicits
the “ Listen and read ”
- Ss read the dialogue and


answer the questions.


- T asks ss to work in pairs to
ask and answer questions
about your schedule.
4. Activity 4.


- SS write their schedule in their
exercise book.



<b>20</b>


<b> </b>
<b> 5</b>


- important: quan trọng
- fun: sự vui đùa


- favorite: a thÝch
- subject: m«n häc


<b>* checking by Matching</b>
<b> 2. Open prediction.</b>


- 5 classes Thu has on Wednesday and
Thursday.


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1.Listening. </b>


Answer key
Friday


7:00 7:50 8:40 9:40 10:30


<b>English</b> <b>Geography</b> <b>Music</b> <b>Physics</b> <b>History</b>


Saturday



1:00 2:40 3:40 4:30


<b>Physical</b>
<b>education</b>


<b>math</b> <b>English</b> <b>Physics.</b>


<b>3. Listen and read</b>


<b> a. comprehension question:</b>


- when does Thu have English classes ?
- What time do they start ?


- what other classes does she have on
Thursday?


- what’s Thu’s favorite subject ? why ?
- what’s Hoa’s favorite subject ? why ?


<b>b. ask and answer.</b>


- work in pairs.


<b>IV. Production.</b>


-

<b>Writing.</b>


<b>Examples: </b>




I have English on Thursday at 4:


30



<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


………


……….


……….


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 04/10/2010




Teaching : 13/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 23 </b>

<b>Unit 4 at school</b>



<b>Lesson 3 A 6.p44-45</b>



<b>I . The aims</b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details
and compare an American school with a Vnese school.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


T and SS’ Activities Time Contents


<i><b> 1. Activity1. </b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


- T lets ss play game “ Hangman”




<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>




- T elicits and models
- ss listen and repeat


- ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by “ Rub out and
remember”


4


10


<b>I. warm up. </b>



* Hang man.


S C H O O L ( 6 letters )


<b>II. Presentation</b>:
1. Vocab


- different: kh¸c nhau.
- a break: giờ nghỉ giải lao
- a cafeteria: quán ăn tự phục vụ
- a snack: món ăn nhanh


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

- T asks ss to predict which


sentences are true and which ones are
False.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text and
check their predictions.


ss read the text again and fill in the
grid and form


compare it in pairs


<i><b>4. Activity 4. </b></i>


- SS write about their school.



18’


5’


- lunch time: thêi gian tra


* checking by Rub out and remember.
2. Pre-reading


- T/F statements predictions. A6.P45


<b>III. Practice.</b>


1. while reading.
a. T/F statements.
Answer key


a. T b. F c. F d. T e. F f. F


b. Grids and form.


Activities In the USA In Viet
Nam
There is a school


uniform... x v


Classes start



at ... 8:30 7:00


The school day


ends at ... 3:30 or 4:30 11: 00 and 17: 00
There are lesson


on Saturday x v


Ss have lunch at


school v x


<b>IV. Production</b>.


Post reading.



Transformation writing. A6.p45


- Example: there is usually school


uniform. Our classes start at



7:00am ...



<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>



- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

Preparation: 06/10/2010



Teaching : 15/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 24 </b>



<b>Trả chữa bài kiểm tra 45</b>

<b> số 1</b>



<b>I . The aims</b>



- help ss to have experience from their writing test.


- master how to use future “ will ” and comparatives and present simple
- ss will appreciate themselves their level of achievement<b> </b>


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: writing test, text book, reference book, answer key.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( no )</b>
<b>3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>
<b> 1. Activity1. </b>


- T retells the use and form of
these structures which were used in
the writing test.


- ss listen and copy down.
<b>2. Activity 2. </b>




- Teacher gives the answer key for
ss to compare.



<b>3. Activity 3</b>.


- T corrects some mistakes that ss
often make


<b>4. Activity 4.</b>




- T gets ss’ points and percentages of
ss’ writing test.


<b>4</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>8</b>


<b>I. The target items that were used in the </b>
<b>writing test. </b>


1. Future: “will”


2. comparatives and superlatives.
a. short adjectives



b. long adjectives
3. present simple.


<b>II. The answer key and points</b>.


<i><b>1. Question1(2,5p): </b></i>


1. a 2. b 3. c 4. a


5. b


<i><b>2. Question 2(2,5p): </b></i>


1. plays 2. is 3. go 4.


are 5. does


<i><b>3. Question 3(2,5p): </b></i>


1. a 2. d 3. b 4. e


5. c


<i><b>4. Question 4 (2,5p): </b></i>


1. Huong is taller than Lan
2. Minh is the best.


3. To¸n is the most expensive.



4. English exercises are more difficult
than Math exercises.


5. Toan is the cheapest.


<b>III. The mistakes that ss often make</b>


1. third person without adding “s or es”


<b> 2</b>. mistaken between superlatives and
comparatives


<b>IV. The result of ss</b>’<b> writing test.</b>


Total of students: ………….
Total of ss’ writing papers:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Excellent: ……… %
Good: ……… %
Fair: ……… %
Poor: ……… %
Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>



- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 12/10/2010



Teaching : 19/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 25 </b>

<b>Unit 4: at School</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1-2. P47,48.</b>




<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to how to use demonstrative: this, that, these,
those


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write structures that are used in the writing test.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity1. </b></i>


- T elicits and models



- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Rub out and
remember ”


<i><b>2. Activity 2. </b></i>


- T asks ss to look at
pictures on P47


- T elicits and models
- SS listen and repeat
- T asks ss to give model


sentences
- Ss copy down.


3. <i><b>Activity 3</b></i>.


- T asks ss to listen to the
Teacher or tape and answer
the questions a -> g on P48
- T asks ss to listen and repeat
- Ss work in pairs to practice


speaking the dialogue


- SS answer the questions


4. <i><b>Activity 4</b></i>.


- T asks ss to write sentences
about the position of books
in the library using the
library vocabulary.


<b>7</b>


<b>10</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>5</b>


<b>I. Pre-Teach.</b>
<b>1. </b>Preteach.


- A library: (n) th viện
- A novel: (n) tiểu thuyết
- A dictionary: (n) từ điển
- A reader: (n) ngời đọc
- Rack: (n) cái giá đỡ


- Shelf -> shelves: (n) c¸i gi¸ s¸ch


<b>II. Presentation.</b>



1. Dùng để hỏi xem ta có thể tìm thấy 1
loại sách ở đâu.


- where can I find + Tên sách, please ?
- S + tobe + giới từ + N(nơi chốn)
2. Dùng để hỏi xem th viện có loại sỏch


bạn cần không.


- Do you have + tên sách + here ?
- Yes/ no I have/ haven’t


<b>III. Practice.</b>


1. Comprehension questions.
a -> g on P48


2. Listen and comprehensions
a. where is Math book ?


b. where are magazines and newspapers ?
c. Are there magazines and newspapers in the
library ?


d. Are there any History books in the
library ?


<b>IV. Production</b>.
* Write it up



- EG: The math book is on the left in the
library.


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- Do exercises in work book and make sentences with occupations
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


………



….……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 14/10/2010



Teaching : 21/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 26 </b>

<b>Unit 4: at School</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B3-4. P48,49.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details and further practice in
comparative and superlative and know the largest library in the world.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>


<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write structures that are used in the writing test.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and </b>SS’ Activities <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Rub out and
remember ”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to look at the pictures
P48 and guess what books are on


<b>7</b>



<b>10</b>


<b>I. Pre - teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.


- Science: môn khoa học
- behind: ở đằng sau
- (to) go on: tiếp tục
- begin: bắt đầu
- receive: nhận đợc
- congress: Quốc hội


“<b>Rub out & Remember</b>”
II. Listening. B3.P48


number Guess/ prediction Listen.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

the racks or shelves.
- T gets feed back.


- SS listen and fill in the table
and check their predictions


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- SS read the text and decide
which sentences are True and which
ones are false



- T gets feed back and corrects
- T asks ss to read again and


answer the questions from a
-> e.


- SS play game “ Lucky
numbers”


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- SS compare their school with the
library of Congress.


<b>15</b>


<b>5</b>


2
3
4
5
6 + 7


8 Librarian’s desk.


<b>III. Reading</b>



<b>1. T/F statements</b>


a. The library of congress is in NewYork.
b. It recieves copies of all English books
c. There are over 100 million books in this
library.


d. The shelves are about 300 km long.
e. 5000 people work in this library.


<b>2. Comprehension questions</b>


* Lucky Numbers.


1-d 2- 3-e 4-b 5- 6-a 7-c


<b>IV. Production</b>.


 <b>Form</b>.


<b>Features</b> <b>School library</b> <b>The library of</b>
<b>Congress.</b>
<b>Smaller</b> <b>v</b>


<b>More</b>
<b>modern</b>


<b>v</b>


<b>Has</b>


<b>more</b>
<b>books</b>


<b>v</b>
<b>More</b>


<b>employee</b> <b>v</b>
<b>Shorter</b>


<b>shelves</b>


<b>v</b>


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….



………


….……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Teaching : 22/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 27 </b>

<b>Revision</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review:
+ present simple tense and future simple tense
+ comparative and superlative


+ present progressive tense


+ there is / there are / this / that / those / these



<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and </b>SS’ Activities <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>




- T retells the use and form of
present simple tense


- asks ss to give an example


- T explains the use and form of


future simple.
- Give an example.


- T gives model of present
progressive tense


- T asks ss to give example


- T retells some model sentences
and give examples


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the passage
and put the verbs in brackets into the
correct form.


- T gets feed back.


- SS make sentences using the
words or phrases given.


<b>15</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>I. Presentation</b>
<b> 1. Simple present.</b>


<b>(+) </b>S + V (s,es) + N


<b>(-)</b> S + don’t / doesn’t + V(infi) + N


<b>(?)</b> Do / Does + S + V(infi) + N ?
Eg: He goes to school by bike.
<b>2. Future simple</b>


<b>(+) </b>S + Will + V(infi) + N


<b>(-)</b> S + won’t + V(infi) + N


<b>(?)</b> Will + S + V(infi) + N ?


Eg: we will go to Ha noi next weekend.
<b>3. Present progressive</b>


<b>(+) </b>S + tobe + V_ ing + N


<b>(-)</b> S + to be + not + V_ ing + N


<b>(?)</b> Tobe + S + V_ ing + N ?
Eg: I am studying English.
<b>4. Some Model sentences</b>


a. There is a ….


Eg: there is a bag on the desk.


b. there are some ….. / are there any …. ?


Eg: there are some books in the bag.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. complete the passage using the </b>
<b>correct form of these verbs.</b>


Tuan …(be) my friend. He …(live) in Bac
Giang with his father, mother and his older
sister. His parents …(be) workers. Tuan …
(go) to Quang Trung school by bike


everyday.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- SS put these verbs in brackets
into the correct form.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>




- T asks ss to study all the “
remember” from unit 3 to unit 4 in
the book.


<b>7</b>


<b>sentences by using future simple.</b>



- go to the post office / v
- call Nam / x


- do the homework / v
- see a movie / v
- watch TV / x


<b>3. Put the verbs in brackets into the </b>
<b>correct form.</b>


a. what is Lan (study) ?
b. Lan is ( play ) video game
c. Hung and Hoa (be) studying
physics.


d. we are ( read ) English novel.


<b>III. Production.</b>


- T lets ss look up and study all


“remember” in the book from unit 3 to unit 4.


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>



- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 19/10/2010



Teaching : 26/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 28</b>



<b>Unit 5 </b>

<b>work and play</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A 1,3</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review:
+ present simple tense to talk about school subjects



<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<b>T</b>’s<b> and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Rub out and


remember ”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene and elicits and
models


- T gives model sentences.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text in
A1.P51 to fill in the grids


- T gets feed back and corrects
- SS practice in a role


+ T – whole class
+ half - half


+ open and close pairs<i><b> </b></i>
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to write about their
classes using these questions


<b>6</b>



<b>7</b>


<b>20</b>


<b>5</b>


<b>I. Pre - teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.
- (to) learn: häc tËp
- (to) use: sư dơng


- (to) be interested in: quan tâm
- a map: bản đồ


- an experiment: cuéc thÝ nghiÖm
- last lesson: tiÕt häc cuèi


“<b>Rub out & Remember</b>”


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Presentation text. A1.P 51</b>
<b>Model sentences</b>


<b>S1: </b>what does Mai do in her computer science
class<b> ?</b>


<b>S2: </b>she learns how to use a computer<b>.</b>


<b>III. Practice</b>


<b>1.</b>Grids and form.


Classes What to do


Computer science To learn how to use a
computer


Geography To study maps and learn
about different countries
Physics To do some experiments


<b> 2. Word cue drill.</b>


<b>A: </b>what does Mai do in her Geography ?
B: she studies maps and learns about different
countries.


<b>3. Comprehension question</b>.
How much does one banana cost ?


<b>IV. Production</b>.


 <b>Writing.</b>


- what time do your classes start ?
- what do you learn at school ?
- what do you do in your computer



science class ?


- what do you do in your Geography class
?


- what do you do in your last lesson ?
- what time do your classes end ?


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

……….


……….


……….


……….



……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 19/10/2010



Teaching : 28/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 29</b>



<b>Unit 5 work and play</b>


<b>Lesson 2. a 2. P52</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details about Ba’s
activities at school and at home.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>



<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T</b>’s<b> and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Matching”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to predict these
statements if they are true or false
- T gets feedback.







<b>7</b>


<b>4</b>


<b>I. Pre - teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.
- (to) enjoy: thÝch.
- (to) repair: sưa ch÷a
- (to) fix: sửa chữa
- electronics: điện tử


- an art club: CLB nghệ thuật
- guitar: đàn ghi ta


- (to) be good at: giái vÒ


“<b>Matching</b>”


<b>II. Pre - reading.</b>


<b>1</b> <b>T/F statements</b>


a. Ba enjoys his school very much
b. His favorite subject is Electronics
c. In this class he does some


experiments



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>




- SS read the text and check their
predictions


- SS read the text again and match
the English words with their Vnese
meaning.


- T asks ss to read again and answer
these questions A2.p54


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to walk round to ask and
answer to fill in the table


- Eg: S1. what’s your favorite
subjects ?


S2. It’s physics.


<b>19</b>


<b>7</b>



<b>III. While - reading.</b>


<b>1. Checking predictions</b>


 Answer key


a. T b. T c. F d. F e. T f. F


<b> 2. Guessing the meaning.</b>


A B


A house hold appliances Bức hoạ
A drawing đàn ghi ta


An artist Thiết bị gia đình


The guitar Ho¹ sÜ


<b>3. Comprehension Questions</b>


* A2. P54: a -> e


<b>IV. Post - reading. </b>


 Survey.
Name Favorite



subjects Good at Freetimeactivity.
Hoa


Nam
Lan


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….



……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 21/10/2010



Teaching : 29/10/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 30</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b>Lesson 3. a 4-6. P54-55</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives.


- By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the listening task and the
reading text.


- Reading a text for details and know how to say about what they study in each subject


<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook



<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T</b>’<b>s and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Slap the board</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- Listen to the teacher’s
presentation and predict.
- T Gets feedback.


- Read and check.


- Read again and answer the
questions.


<b>Keys</b>


1. We study about books and write
essays.


2. We study past and present events
in VN and around the world.


3. Geography.
4. Yes, we do.


5. We study music, art and art.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


<b>7</b>


<b>17</b>


<b>13</b>


<b>I. Pre - teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.



- an essay : bµi luận, bài văn (Explanation)
- a calculator: máy tính (Visual)


- an event: Sự kiện (Translation)
- author (n): tác giả (Explanation)
- a globe: quả địa cầu (Explanation)
- temperature (n): nhiệt độ (Translation)


“<b>Slap the board</b>”


<b>II. reading.</b>


<b>1. </b><i><b>Pre reading</b></i>


<b>* (Open prediction).</b>
<b> 2. </b><i><b>While reading</b></i><b>.</b>


+ Comprehension questions.
1. What do you study in literature?
2. What do you study in history?


3. What subject do you study about different
countries and their people?


4. Do you speak English in language class?
5. What other subjects do you study?


<b> 3. Post - reading. </b>


Matching - A6 page 55.



<b>Keys</b>


Physical education – games ...
Geography - map...
Music - piano...
Art - paint...
Math - graphs...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>



- T Gets students to match the
subject with the correct items.


- SS Match and give the answers.
- Get feedback


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- Listen to the teacher’s
presentation and think of the
answers.


- Give the predictions.


- Listen and check the prediction.
- Listen again and write the correct
letter next to the names.


<b>1.</b><i><b>* Pre listening.</b></i>



- Teacher presents about the listening task, asks
students to predict what subject Ba/ Hoa has on
Saturday morning.


- Get feedback.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 2. * While listening.</b></i>


- Teacher plays the stereo, students listen and
check their prediction.


- Get feedback.


<b>Keys</b>


Ba: d, a, e.
Hoa: c, b, e.


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.



- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


Preparation: 23/10/2010



Teaching : 02/11/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 31</b>



<b>Unit 5 work and play</b>


<b>Lesson 4. b1-2. P56-57</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text
and talk about their recess activities.


- Reading a text for details.


- Talking about the recess activities.



- Listen and match the name with an activitiy.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Speaking, Reading and listening skills development
3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>




- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T Asks students to listen to the
text, read and complete the list.
- SS Listen to the text, read and
complete the list.


- T Gets feed back from students


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- Ask students to retell how to use
and the form of present progressive.
- Retell the form and use of present
progressive.


- Get some pairs to stand up and
practice aloud.


- Get feedback from students
- T Asks students to listen and
match each name to an activity
- SS Listen to the stereo and match
the names with activities.



- Get feedback from students


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- Work in pairs to ask and answer
the questions in B1.


- Practice aloud.


- Write about the activities they do
at the recess.


- Compare with friends.


<b>8</b>


<b>7</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>7</b>


<b>I. Pre - teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.


- (To) chat: tán gẫu (Explanation)


- excited (adj): hào hứng, phấn khởi (Trans)


- (To) skip rope: nhảy dây (Picture)


- bell (n): chuông (Explanation)
- (to) ring: rung lên (Translation)


- blind mans bluff: bịt mắt bắt dª (Trans)
-(to)play marble (n): chơi bắn bi
(Explanation)


<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>II. Presentation</b>


Presentation.


Recess activities The most popular
activities


- meeting friend.


<b>Keys</b>


Talking, eating,
drinking, chatting,
playingcatch/
marbles/


blindman’sbluff,
skipping rope



<i><b> </b></i><b>Keys</b>


- Talking


<b>III. Practice</b>


<b>1. (Picture cue).</b>


Eg: S1: What is the boy/ girl doing?
S2: He is reading.


S1: What are these students doing?
S2: ...




<b>2. Listen (B2 page 57).</b>
<b>Keys</b>


- Mai and Bi are playing catch.


- Kien is playing blind man’s Bluff with
some friends.


- Lan is skipping rope.
- Ba is playing marbles.
- Get feedback from students


<b>IV. Production.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<b> 2. Write it up.</b>
<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


Preparation: 25/10/2010



Teaching : 04/11/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 32</b>



<b>Unit 5 work and play</b>


<b>Lesson 5. b3-4. P57-58</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to study activities
American students do at the recess.


- further practice in present simple tense and school vocab.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Speaking & Reading skills development



3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> (5)</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and make sentences with present
progressive tense: “ S + be + V_ing + N”


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>




- T lets ss play games
“<b>Hang man</b>”
- T suggests: “ this is a short
period of time after each
classes”



<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their


<b>4</b>


<b>7</b>


<b>I. Warm - UP. </b>


<b>* Hang Man</b>.


<b>R E C E S S</b>


There are six letters


<b>II. Preteach.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

notebook.
- T checks by


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”



<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T sets the scene and models
B3.P57


- Ss predict to answer this questions.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text B3.P57 to
do the matching.


- T asks ss to read the text again and
do exercises on P58


“<b>Multiple choice</b>”


<i><b> 5.. Activity 5.</b></i>


- T asks ss to write sentences about
people they’ve asked above.


<b>5</b>


<b>16</b>


<b>5</b>



- Earphone: tai nghe


- Energetic: hiếu động, năng nổ
- (to) swap: trao đổi


- Junior high school: trêng cÊp 2
- Senior high school: trêng cÊp 3
“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>III. Presentation</b>


<b>1. Presentation Text. B3.57</b>


<b>2. Prediction</b>


<b>What do ss in American schools do at </b>
<b>recess ?</b>


<b>IV. Practice</b>
<b>1. Matching.</b>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>


Portable CD players Bạn qua th
Packets of candy Khắp thế giới


World wide Máy nghe CD xách tay
Baseball players Những gói kẹo


Penpal Những cầu thủ bóng chày



<b>2. Multiple choice. P58</b>


Answer key.


a - C b - A c - D d - D


<b>3. Speaking: Survey B4.p58</b>


<b>Name</b> <b>Activities</b>
<b>soccer</b> <b>catch</b> <b>Skip</b>


<b>rope</b> <b>marbles</b> <b>read</b> <b>talk</b> <b>others</b>


<b>Hoa</b> <b>v</b> <b>v</b>


Eg: what do you usually do at recess ?
I usually skip rope.


<b>V. Production</b>


* Write it up.


Eg: her name is Hoa. She usually skips rope
sometimes she talks to her friends at recess.


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

……….


……….


……….


……….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 27/10/2010



Teaching : 05/11/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 33</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 1. A1. P60-61</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>



1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a dialogue about
after school activities and get further practice in the present progressive.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening & Reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1)</b>


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and make sentences with present
progressive tense: “ S + be + V_ing + N”


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS</b>’<b> Activities</b> <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>





T asks ss to come to the bb to
write as many freetime


activities as they can.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


<b>3</b>


<b>7</b>


<b>I. Warm - UP. </b>


<b>* Net work.</b>


Play guitar Play sports
Watch TV Play
soccer


Go shopping


Skipping rope


Meet friends


<b>II. Preteach.</b>


- (to) practice: thùc hµnh
- (to) invite: mêi


- (to) enjoy: thÝch
- together: cïng nhau


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- T checks by


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T sets the scene and models
A1.P60


- ss listen and repeat.


- T asks ss to find out the model
sentences


- T checks and explains
- T does the concept-check.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>



- T asks ss to read the dialogue
A1.P60 to answer the questions
below. A -> f. 61


<i><b> 5.. Activity 5.</b></i>


- T lets ss play game


“<b>noughts and crosses</b>”
By making sentences using


progressive tense.


<b>6</b>


<b>15</b>


<b>7</b>


- (to) relax: gi¶i lao
- (to) meet: gỈp nhau
- maybe:cã lÏ


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>III. Presentation</b>


<b> 1. Presentation Text. A1.60</b>



<b>2. Model sentences</b>


- Let’s do something


- why don’t you do something
- how about doing something


<b>IV. Practice</b>


<b>1. Practice speaking Dialogue.</b>


<b>2. Comprehension questions</b>
<b>- Question a -> f. 61</b>


- Eg: a. what is Hoa doing ?


-> she is doing her math homework.


<b>V. Production</b>


* Noughts and crosses.
Lan / do /


homework Those boys /Computer
games


Minh / skip
rope
You / listen



to music Mai and Hoa /talk The girls /Watch TV
Nam / play


marbles Long & Minhchat The guitarBa / play


<b>4. Consolidation (1)</b>


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>


- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


……….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

……….



<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 29/10/2009



Teaching : 03/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 34</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 2. A2. P61</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more new words
and further practice in adverbs of frequency with simple present tense for after –
school activities


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking & writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’



- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>




T asks ss to come to the bb to
write as many freetime


activities as they can.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene and presents
one by one picture in A2.P61.


<b>3</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Warm - UP. </b>


<b>* Net work.</b>



swimming Play sports
Watch TV Play soccer
Reading


Watch TV
Go shopping Skipping rope
Meet friends Listening to music


<b>II. Presentation</b>


<b> 1. Presentation Pictures. A2a.61</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

- T asks ss to look at the


activities and label the pictures.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T retells ss the adverbs of
frequency: usually, sometimes,
often, always, never.


- T lets ss play game


<b>noughts and crosses </b>


“ ”


By making sentences using
progressive tense.



<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to write sentences using
the information that they have
spoken.


<b>20</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>Answer Keys</b>


<b> </b>1. Reading 2. Swimming
3. Playing Video games 4. going to the movies
5. playing soccer 6. watching TV


<b>III. Practice</b>


<b>1. Practice speaking A2b.P61</b>


Eg: S1. what do you usually do after school ?
S2. I usually watch TV.


<b>2. Noughts and crosses</b>


* Noughts and crosses.
Always / go



swimming Often / go tothe beach Never / go tothe library
Usually /


play soccer Sometimes /play video
games


Often / go to
the movies
Usually /


watch TV


Often / play
tennis


Sometimes /
do the
homework


<b>IV. Production</b>


* Write it up.


Eg: I often play tennis
I usually watch TV


He sometimes plays video games.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


Preparation: 01/11/2009



Teaching : 04/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 35</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 3. A3 - 4. P62-63.</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read the text for
details about pastime activities.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.


2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to close their books
and read these sentences to predict


which sentences are T and which
ones are F.


- T gets feedback.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text and
check their predictions.


- T gives the answers


- T asks ss to read again and answer
these questions.P62


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to listen to the T’s
reading and match the names to an
activity in A4.P63.


- SS write a short paragraph about
after school.


<b>7</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>18</b>’



<b>8</b>’


<b>I. Preteach. </b>


- sporty: ham mª TDTT


- a president: chđ tÞch


- an anniversary celebration: lƠ kØ niƯm
- (to) rehearse: diƠn tËp


- a comic: trun tranh
- (to) collect: su tầm
- a play: vở kịch


“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>II. Pre-reading.</b>
<b> 1. T/F statements</b>


a. Nga, Ba, Nam are students in class 7A
b. They like sports very much


c. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging
d. Ba likes collecting stamps


e. Nam plays soccer every afternoon
f. Nam usually watches TV


<b>III. While-reading.</b>



<b>1. Checking predictions</b>


Answer key.


<b>a. T b. F c. F d. T e. F f. T</b>
<b> </b>


<b> 2. Comprehension questions.</b>
<b> A -> d.P62</b>


<b>IV. Post-reading.</b>


1. Listening A4.P63.


2. Write it up.
Eg:


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

- Prepare for next lesson :


Preparation: 02/11/2009




Teaching : 09/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 36</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 4. B1. Let s go.</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use model verbs: can,
could, should …


- making suggestions: Let’s, what about, why don’t you …


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Matching</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene and models
the text


- T asks ss to give model sentences


- T explains and give the form
- ss copy down.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice in a role


+ T – whole class


+ half - half


+ open and close pairs


<b>6</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>I. Preteach. </b>


- at the moment: lóc nµy
- assignments: nhiƯm vơ
- fun : niỊm vui


- (to) join: tham gia
- let’s …: chóng ta h·y


“<b>Matching</b>”


<b>II. Presentation</b>


<b>1. Presentation Text B1.64</b>
<b>2. Model sentences</b>


* suggestion:



- Let’s go to my house


- what about going to the movies
- why don’t we relax?


* Responses.
- yes, let
- good idea
- sorry I can’t


<b>III. Practice.</b>
<b>1. word cue drill.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

- T gives an example


- T asks ss to read the text again and
answer these questions


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking


<b>6</b>’


<b>2. Comprehension questions.</b>
<b> B1. a -> e .P64</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


1. Mapped dialogue


You


What … do …
afternoon?
Not good movie
Too far … not have


a bike
ok
Your friend


movies?
Mai’s house


Take abus
bye


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


Preparation: 05/11/2009




Teaching : 11/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 37</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 4. B2. Let s go.</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a magazine
survey about the most popular activities of American teenagers


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>


Why / join / us


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss play game “<b>pelmanism</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Matching</b>”
- ss predict what American
teenagers like to do in their free
time.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T asks ss to read B2.P65 and check
their predictions



- T asks ss to read the text again and
answer these questions


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking by
working in group of 4 to ask their
friends what they like doing in their
free time


<b>3</b>’


<b>11</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>I. Pelmanism</b>


What about Why don’t Let’s…
Collect stamp Going to the


circus ? You study in the library ?


<b>II. Pre-reading.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a teenager: thiÕu niªn



- a musical instrument: nhạc cụ
- a model: hình mẫu


- a guide: hớng dÉn viªn
- (to) attend: tham dù


“<b>Matching</b>”
<b>2. Open Prediction</b>


<b>- </b>ss predict what American teenagers like to do
in their free time.


<b>II. While-reading.</b>


<b>1. Checking prediction B2.65</b>
<b>2. Comprehension questions</b>


- which of the activities in the list of American
teenagers do you think are also popular among
VNese teenagers?


- Are there many kinds of entertainment for
tennagers in VN? What are they?


- what organizations are these for teenagers in
VN?


<b>III. Post-reading</b>
<b>1. Discussion.</b>



<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

………


.




………


.




………


.




………


.





………


.




………


.




………


.




………


.




<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 08/11/2009




Teaching : 12/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 38</b>



<b>Unit 6 After school</b>


<b>Lesson 5. B3,4. Let s go.</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to master these
structures:


“ would you like ….. / Yes, I’d love to …” and make invitations & acceptance of
invitations & polite refusal.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus


<b>6</b>’ <b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T presents the text B3.P66
- T elicits and models


sentences.



- Ss listen and repeat
- Ss copy down.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking by
working in pairs to ask and answer
in a role in the dialogue.B3P66


- ss read the text.B4P66 and
answer these questions on
P67.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss write what American students
do in their free time to help
community


- T walks around to help ss to do


<b>10</b>’


<b>16</b>’


<b>5</b>’


- elderly : giµ


- (to) clean : lau chïi


- (to) Paint : vÏ, s¬n
- stripe : (adj) kẻ sọc
- (to) wear : mặc


- environment : môi trờng
<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Presentation text. B3.66</b>
<b>2. Model sentences.</b>


- would you like to come to my house for
lunch?


- Yes, I’d love to


- I’m sorry, I can’t come.


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Speaking.B3.P66</b>


<b>2. Reading.B4.P66</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Write it up.</b>


<b>Eg: </b>They do their shoping or cleaning the yards


and they paint the houses or they work on
neighborhood clear-up campaigns.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………


.




………


.




………


.





………


.




………


.




………


.




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

.




………


.





<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 10/11/2009



Teaching : 16/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 39</b>



<b>Language Focus 2.</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice in present
progressive, the time and subject vocab, adv of frequency & making suggestions.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and explains the usages
and form of Present progressive
tense.


- Ss listen and copy down in their
notebook.


- ss retell the adverbs of frequency.


<b>6</b>’


<b>4</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b> 1. Present Progressive tense.</b>


S + tobe + V-ing + N


* Note: những trờng hợp đặc biệt khi thêm
“ing”: - những động từ tận cùng là “E” thì bỏ
“E” rồi mới thêm “ing”



- Những động từ tận cùng là 1 phụ âm
mà ngay trớc nó là 1 nguyên âm thì nhân đơI
phụ âm đó lên rồi mới thêm “ing”


<b>2. Adverbs of frequency:</b>


- Always: luôn luôn
- Usually: thờng xuyên
- Often: thờng


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

- T asks ss to give the model
sentences of making suggestions.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss complete the passage by giving
the correct form of these verbs in
Ex.P 68.<i><b> </b></i>


- SS work in pairs to ask and answer
to fill in the time…


- SS match the subjects to the
pictures in Ex4.P70


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss write sentences about Ba in
Ex5.P 71



<b>3</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>3. Making suggestions:</b>


- Let’s + V(infi)…
- what about + V-ing …
- Why don’t you + V(infi) …
- would you like + to + V(infi) …
<b>4. Times, subjects, Pronouns</b>
<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Gap-fill. </b>
<b>- EX 1.P 68</b>


<b>2. Speaking.</b>


<b>Ex 2.P 68, 3.P 69, 6.P71</b>
<b>3. Matching.</b>


<b> - Ex4.P 70</b>
<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Write it up.</b>



<b>Eg: </b>Ba nevers goes to the cafeteria at lunch
time.


- He usually practices the guitar after school.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………


.




………


.




………



.




………


.




………


.




………


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 15/11/2009



Teaching : 18/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 40 </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<b>I. The aims.</b>


- To help ss to systematize the content from unit 1 to unit 3 and review grammar:


+ Present simple tense


+ future simple tense.


+ comparatives and superlatives
+ ordinal number and occupations...


<b>II. The content</b>


<b>1. Questions.</b>


I. Put the verbs in the brackets into the correct form


1. Trang ( not / write ) to her parents last week. She phoned them.
2. You ( go ) out last night ?


3. Yes, I ( go ) to the cinema.


4. How much it ( cost ) to mail a letter to England ?
II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences.
1. it took us an hour .... to Nha Trang


a. drive b. driving c. to drive d. drove
2. Hung and his brother … At home yesterday


a. didn’t are b. wasn’t c. not were d. weren’t
3. May I have .... sugar ?


a. one b. a c. some d. many



4. My brother doesn’t like pork and ….


a. either do I b. Neither do I c. neither I do d. I don’t too
III. Match the questions in column A with the answers in column B
A


1. What’s wrong with you ?
2. Where were you last night ?
3. Was there any good on TV last


night ?


4. What time was It on ?


B


a. From seven to nine
b. I was at Lan’s house
c. Yes, there was an


interesting nature
program.


d. I have a headache
IV. Complete the sentences using the words and phrases given
1. Uncle Ho / born / 1890 / was / in / Nghe An / in.


2. She / read and write / could / age / at the / four / of.
V. Read the passage and answer the questions below.



<i>Mark Twain was a famous America writer. He was born in a small town in the USA. </i>
<i>When he was twelve years old, his father died. He began to work and learned the profession </i>
<i>of a printer. He began to write short stories under the name of Mark Twain. He sent them to </i>
<i>newspapers. The reader liked his stories very much.</i>


1. Where was Mark Twain born ?


2. How old was he when his father died ?
3. What did he begin to do then ?


4. Did the readers like his stories ?


<b>2</b> <b>. Answer keys and points.</b>


I. ( 2d ) 1. didn’t write 2. did you go 3. went 4.
Does it cost


II. ( 2d ) 1. c 2. d 3. c 4. b


III. ( 2d ) 1. d 2. b 3. c 4. a


IV ( 2d )


1. Uncle Ho was born in Nghe An in 1890.
2. She could read and write at the age of four.
V. ( 2d )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

2. He was twelve when his father died.


3. He began to work and learn the profession of a printer.


4. Yes, they did.


<b>3</b> <b>Result and percent</b>


Total of students: …………. Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %


- Good: ……… %
- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4</b> <b>Consolidation</b>


<b>- </b>T comments ss’ attitude and ss’ attention


<b>5</b> <b>Appreciation and Homework.</b>


- Prepare for next lesson.


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


Preparation: 15/11/2009


Teaching : 18/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 41</b>



<b>Unit 7 The world of work.</b>


<b>Lesson 1. A1. A student s work.</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice comparative
with “fewer/ more” to talk about student’s work.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook



<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


<b>7</b>’ <b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>



- T presents the text A1.P72
- T elicits and models


sentences.


- Ss listen and repeat
- Ss copy down.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice speaking in a
role:


+ T & whole class
+ Half & half


+ Open & close pairs


- ss work in pairs to practice
speaking.


- T asks ss to read the dialogue
again to answer the questions on
P73.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss write what American students
do in their free time to help
community



- T walks around to help ss to do


<b>10</b>’


<b>16</b>’


<b>5</b>’


- hard : khã, vÊt v¶


- late -> later : muén – muén h¬n


- (to) be late for sth : muộn làm việc gì …
- (to) take _ hours to do sth : mất bao lâu để
làm gì …


- many -> more : nhiỊu - nhiỊu h¬n
- few -> fewer : Ýt – Ýt h¬n


- early -> earlier: sím - sím h¬n
“<b>Rub out and remember</b>”


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Presentation text. A1.72</b>
<b>2. Model sentences.</b>


- My classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes.
- I work fewer hours than Hoa



- Form: S1 + V + earlier + than + S2.


<b> </b>Fewer + N
More + N


<b>III. Practice.</b>
<b>1. Word cue drill.</b>


- Hoa’s classes: 7:00/ our classes: 6: 45/ -> start
- Hoa: 2 hours/ Miss Lan: 4 hours/ -> work
- The film: 8:45/ The play: 10:00/ -> finish
- lesson 1: 8 activities/ Lesson 3: 3 activities/ ->
have


+ Eg:


S1: Hoa’s classes start later than our classes.
S2: Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes.


<b>2. Speaking.A1.P72.</b>


<b>3. Comprehension questions</b>
<b>- Question a-> g on P73 in Ex. A1</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Noughts and crosses</b>


Classes start School year



start Summervacation
finish
Summer


vacation start Work( hours) Classes finish
Activities in


summer
vacation


School year


finish. Lucky No


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson.


Preparation: 21/11/2009


Teaching : 23/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 42</b>



<b>Unit 7 The world of work.</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2,3. A student s work.</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for details to
compare American ss’ vacation & VNese ss’ vacation


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b> The Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>



- ss play game.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


<i><b> </b></i>


- T asks ss to close their book and
predict which sentenses are true and
which ones are false.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b> </b></i>


<b>3</b>’


<b>12</b>’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>



* Pelmanism


early late long few
fewer longer later earlier.


<b>II. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) celebrate: kØ niƯm
- Easter : LƠ Phơc sinh
- Thanksgiving : LƠ tạ ơn.


- Newyears Eve : Đêm giao thừa


- Independence Day : ngày Quốc khánh
- Christmas : Lễ Nôel


<b>Rub out and remember</b>”
2. Pre-reading.


a. VNese ss have fewer vacations than
American ss


b. American ss have the longest vacation in
the winter.


c. They don’t have a Tet holiday


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text A2. 73 to
check their predictions




- ss read the text again and fill in
this grid.


- T asks ss to compare it in pairs
- T checks and corrects.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss look at the pictures in A3.P74
- ss listen and match the names of
the public holiday with each picture.


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


Year’s Day


e. They usually spend this time with their
families on ThanksGiving and Christmas


day.


<b>III. While-reading.</b>


<b>1. Checking ss Predictions</b>’


<b>Answer key</b>


a. T b. F c. T d. F e. F


<b>2. Grids.</b>


Vacations VNese


students Americanstudents
Longest


vacation summerIn the summerIn the


Tet holiday v x


Thanks


Giving x v


Christmas x v


Independence


day Sep 2



nd <sub>July 4</sub>th


IV. Post-reading.


 A3.P 74 Listening.
Answer key
a. Thanks Giving
b. Independence Day
c. New Year’s Eve
d. Christmas


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


..


………


..


..



………


..


..


………


..


..


………


..


..


………


..


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 21/11/2009


Teaching : 24/11/2009

<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Unit 7 The world of work.</b>


<b>Lesson 3. A4. A student s work.P75</b>’


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for details about
a typical ss’ life.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models



- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Slap the board</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss guess the amount of time
Hoa spends on her work.
- Ss fill in these gaps
- T gets feed back.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text and
check their predictions




- ss read the text again and answer
the questions a -> g by playing
game “ Lucky Numbers”


- ss play game.


<b>7</b>’



<b>5</b>’


<b>21</b>’


<b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) review: ôn lại
- period : tiết học


- typical : tiêu biểu, điển hình
- (to) think : nghĩ


- keen (adj) : tiên tiÕn
- lazy (adj) : lêi biÕng


“<b>Slap the board</b>”


<b>II. Pre-reading.</b>


<b>1. Open prediction. A4.75</b>


a. Hoa goes to school --- days a week
b. She has --- periods a day


c. She works ---- hours a week


d. She has about --- hours of home work every
week



e. Before tests she works --- hours a week.


<b>III. While-reading.</b>
<b>1. Check predictions.</b>


<b>Answer key</b>


a. six b. five c. 20 d. 12 e. 45


<b>2. Comprehension questions. A4.P75</b>
<b> * Lucky numbers.</b>


Questions a -> d in the text book<b>.</b>


e. Does Hoa have to work at home ?
f. How many hours a week does


Hoa work before test ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss some questions about the
text.


<b>5</b>’


before test ?



1. a 2. LN 3. b 4. c 5. LN 6.
d


7. e 8. LN 9. f 10. g


<b>IV. Post-reading.</b>


 <b>Speaking.</b>


- Questions and answers


Eg: what do you think of students’ life ?
Do you think students are lazy ?


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


..


………



..


..


………


..


..


………


..


Preparation: 21/11/2009


Teaching : 25/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 44 </b>



<b>Tr¶ chữa bài kiểm tra 45 số 2</b>



<b>I . The aims</b>


- help ss to have experience from their writing test.


- master how to use future “ will ” and comparatives and present simple
- ss will appreciate themselves their level of achievement<b> </b>


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: writing test, text book, reference book, answer key.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( no )</b>
<b>3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b> 1. Activity1. </b>


- T retells the use and form of
these structures which were used in
the writing test.


- ss listen and copy down.
<b>2. Activity 2. </b>




- Teacher gives the answer key for
ss to compare.


<b>4</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>I. The target items that were used in the </b>


<b>writing test. </b>


+ Present simple tense
+ future simple tense.


+ comparatives and superlatives
+ ordinal number and occupations...


<b>II. The answer key and points</b>.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>



<b>3. Activity 3</b>.


- T corrects some mistakes that ss
often make


<b>4. Activity 4.</b>




- T gets ss’ points and percentages of
ss’ writing test.


<b>15</b>’


<b>8</b>’


3. c 4. b



QIII. ( 2d ) 1. d 2. b


3. c 4. a


QIV ( 2d )


1. Uncle Ho was born in Nghe
An in 1890.


2. She could read and write at
the age of four.


QV. ( 2d )


1. He was born in a small town
in the USA.


2. He was twelve when his father
died.


3. He began to work and learn
the profession of a printer.


4. Yes, they did.


<b>III. The mistakes that ss often make</b>


1. third person without adding “s or es”



<b> 2</b>. mistaken between superlatives and
comparatives


<b>IV. The result of ss writing test.</b>’
Total of students: ………….


Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %
- Good: ……… %
- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 21/11/2009


Teaching : 26/11/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 45</b>



<b>Unit 7 The world of work.</b>


<b>Lesson 4. B1,4. The worker</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>



1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read Tim’s letter about
his parents’ job amd getting further practice in simple present and listen for specific
details


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus


and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b> Rub out & </b>
<b>Remember </b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and presents the table in
B4.P78


- ss predict what Peter / Susan / Jane
Phong do.


<b>8</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>19</b>’


<b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) take care of: chăm sóc
- (to) repair : sữa chữa
- (to) play golf : chơi gôn


- (to) work part time : lµm viƯc ngoµi giê


- a mechanic : thợ máy


- shift : ca làm việc / buổi học
- homeless: không nhà cửa
- duty: nhiệm vụ


<b> Rub out & Remember </b>”


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read Tim’s letter and
answer the questions a -> e in
B1.P76


- T asks ss read to listen and check
their predictions


- ss listen again and fill in the table
in B4.P78


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to rewrite the letter. P76
by replacing the information about
Tim’s family with the information
about their own family.


<b>6</b>’



<b>III. Practice.</b>
<b>1. Reading.</b>


<b>* Comprehension questions. B1.P76</b>
<b>Answer key</b>


a. She works at home


b. She cooks lunch for homeless people
c. He is a mechanic.


d. He usually works about 40 hours a week.
e. They always go to Florida on vacation.


<b> 2. Listening. B4.P78</b>
<b> </b>


<b> a. Check Predictions.</b>
<b> </b>


<b> b. Grid and Form. B4.P78</b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Transformation writing.</b>


- Eg: I am pleased that you and your
family are well. I am fine, too. There is
a photor of me, my parents and my


brother ….


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 24/11/2009


Teaching : 01/12/2009

<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

<b>Unit 7 The world of work.</b>


<b>Lesson 5. B2,3. The worker.P77</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice comparatives
with “ more / less / fewer ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’



- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss make a tick for the information
about Mr Jones’ work


- T checks and corrects


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b> Rub out & </b>
<b>Remember </b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits
B2.P77



- T asks ss to read the text and
give model sentences


- T does the concept-check.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss read the text and fill in the grid
in B3.P77


- ss read the text again and answer
the questions in the book.


<b>3</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>


Day off Week vacation Hour per week
40


2
3



<b>II. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) feed: cho ăn
- (to) rest : nghỉ ngơi


- (to) clean : lau chùi, quét dọn
- animal : động vật


- a pig : con lỵn


- the main crop : vơ chÝnh
- the buffalo shed : chng tr©u
- duty: nhiƯm vơ


“<b> Rub out & Remember </b>”


<b>2. Presentation Text. B2.P77</b>
<b>Model sentences</b>


- Mr Tuan works more hours than Mr Jones
- Mr Jones works fewer hours than Mr Tuan
- Mr Jones has more vacation time than Mr
Tuan


- Mr Tuan has less vacation time than Mr
Jones


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Grid. B3.77</b>


<b>2. Comprehension questions. B3.P77</b>


a. what is Mr Tuan’s job ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

- T gets feed back and corrects


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4</b></i>


- T asks ss to make new sentences
about the amount of food in the
fridge 1 and 2.


<b>6</b>’


c. what does he do from 12 to 1 o’clock
d. does he have any vacation ?


e. what time dies he finish his work ?


<b> </b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Further practice.</b>


- Eg: there are more eggs in fridge 2 than


fridge 1.


- There is less milk in fridge 2 than
fridge 1.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 24/11/2009


Teaching : 01/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 47</b>



<b>REVISION</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review comparation
and modal, suggestion and invitation.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- - T retells structurres of
comparison.


- T asks ss to give example


- T retells the form of Modal
sentences


- Ss give some examples


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>




- T asks ss to read these sentences
and make comparison between them.
- T checks and corrects


- T asks ss to open their workbook
and do Exercises 1 & 3.



<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss work in pairs to ask and answer
each other about age, period, time


.


……


<b>15</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>I. Presentation</b>


<b>1. Comparation</b>
<b>- Form: </b>


<b>S1 + V + more hours + N + than + S2</b>
<b> Earlier</b>


<b> Fewer hours + N </b>


<b> 2. Modal Verbs: suggestion and Invitation</b>
<b> Should</b>



<b> May</b>
<b> Can</b>


<b>S + Could + V(infi) + N</b>
<b> Might</b>


<b> Must</b>
<b> Ought to </b>


 <b>What about …. + V-ing …</b>


 <b>Would you like to + V (infi) …</b>


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Complete sentences with fewer, less, </b>
<b>or more</b>


a. Hoa has five periods aday. Lan has
seven.


-> Hoa has --- period aday than Lan.
-> Lan has --- than Hoa


b. Lan eats two bowls of rice, Ba eats three.
-> Lan eats --- rice


-> Ba eats - rice
---c. VNese students have 3 vacations ayear,
American students have 5.



-> VNese students have --- vacation
> American students have vacation


<b> 2. Exercise 1 & Exercise 2 in workbook.</b>
<b> </b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Speaking.</b>


 <b>Ss make comparison about what</b>
<b>they ve spoken</b>’


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

- SS do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 24/11/2009


Teaching : 02/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 48</b>



<b>Unit 8 Places</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1-3</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice “where”
question, prepositions of place with place vocab.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by


“<b> Rub out & Remember </b>”



<b>8</b>’ <b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- Bank: ngân hàng
- Post office : bu điện
- railway station: nhà ga
- police station: đồn công an
- super market: siêu thị


- souvenir shop: cửa hàng đồ lu niệm
- museum: bảo tàng


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene


- T elicits and asks ss to match the
names to each picture in A1.P79


<i><b> </b></i>


- T elicits and models A2.P80
- T gives model sentences and


explains


- Ss copy down the form. <i><b> </b></i>


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>



- ss come to the bb to write as many
preposition of places as they can


- ss work in pairs to practice
speaking the dialogue.


- ss look at the map in A3.P81 to
ask and answer about the bank,
police station, shoe store, book
store.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss write the location of each store.


<b>10</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>II. Presentation. </b>
<b> 1. A1.P79</b>


<b>Answers key.</b>


a. National Bank of VN
b. Saint Paul Hospital
c. Hotel



d. The Central post office
e. HN railway station
f. Dong Xuan Market.


<b> 2. Presentation Text. A2.P80</b>
<b> 3. Model sentences.</b>


Could you tell me how to get there ?
show me the way to the post office?
- go straight and turn left.


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Brain storming</b>


In front of
between


next to near


behind opposite


<b> 2. Practice dialogue. A2.P80</b>




<b>3. Picture drill. A3.P81 </b>
<b>Example Exchange.</b>


- S1: where is the bank ?



- S2: It is between the hotel and restaurant. It’s
opposite the hospital.<b> </b>


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Further practice.</b>


- Eg: the clothing store is on HBTrung
street.


- It is near the shoe store to the right.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

………
….


………
….


Preparation: 29/11/2009


Teaching : 03/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 49</b>



<b>Unit 8 Places</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A4-5.P82</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice with
“how far” to talk about distances


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’



<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in workbook.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by
“<b> Slap the board </b>”


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene
- T elicits and models.


- T asks ss to give model sentences
- T does the concept-check.<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss work in pairs to practice the
dialogue


- ss practice in a role with structure:
“ How far ”


<b>6</b>’


<b>11</b>’


<b>16</b>’


<b>I. Preteach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a long way: đờng dài


- It takes time to get there: hết tg để tới ….
- how far: bao xa


- (to) think: nghĩ
- (to) guess: đoán


<b> Slap the board </b>”


<b>II. Presentation. </b>



<b> 1. Presentation Text. A4.P82</b>
<b> </b>


<b> 2. Model sentences</b>


<b>- How far is it from HN to HCM city ?</b>
<b>- It s about 1726 km</b>’


<b>Form: </b>How far is it from + Place1 to Place2 ?
It’s about + Km.<b> </b>


<b>III. Practice.</b>
<b>1. Speaking.</b>


<b>2. Word cue drill. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss look at the map.P81 to ask
and answer about places in
the map.


- Eg: hospital, book store,
bank…..


<b>5</b>’


- HN -> HCM : 1726 km.


<b>IV. Production.</b>



 <b>Speaking.</b>


- Eg: where is th bank ?


Or: could you tell me the way to the bank?
- could you tell me how to get to the


book store from the library ?


-> go straight ahead to the park, take the
first street on the left and it is between the
bank and restaurant.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 29/11/2009


Teaching : 08/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 50</b>



<b>Unit 8 Places</b>



<b>Lesson 3. B1.P83</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to further practice in
listening and asking & telling the price.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and listening skills development



3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and make sentences about the
distance from this house to hospital, bank, and post office.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.



- T checks by


“<b> What and where </b>”


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene


- T asks ss to close their book and
read these sentences to predict
which ones are T or F.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss listen and check their
predictions


- T checks and corrects them.


- ss play game “ Lucky Number” by
answering the questions a-> d and
some more questions which T gives.
- T gets feed back.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss write about themselves using
these questions as a guide



Eg:


a. where is the nearest post office?
b. How can you get there ?


c. what can you buy there ?


………


<b>13</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>I. Pre-listening</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- an envelop: phong b×
- a stamp: tem th
- change: tiền trả lại


- (to) send / mail a letter: gưi th
- (to) cost: gi¸


“<b> what and where </b>”


<b>2. T/F statement Prediction</b>



a. Liz would like to send a letter to Great
Britain.


b. She needs some envelopes
c. they are 2,500 dong


d. The envelopes and stamps are 11,500 dong.


<b>II. While-listening. </b>


<b>1. T/F statements checking. B1.P83</b>


<i><b>Answer key</b></i>


<b> </b>a. F b. T c. F d. T


<b> 2. Comprehension questions </b>
<b>(Luckey Numbers)</b>


1- a 2- LN 3- b 4- c
5- d 6- LN 7- e 8- f


<b>III. Post-listening.</b>
<b>1. Writing.</b>


<b>* Eg: </b>My nearest post office is about 500
metres from my house, I can get there by bike.
There I can buy envelopes and postcards … A
letter in Viet Nam costs 800 dong. I can make
a phone call there, too.





<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 29/11/2009


Teaching : 09/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 51</b>



<b>Unit 8 Places</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B2.P84</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a dialogue to
understand the details and get further practice in “ need / would like ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by “<b>Slap the board</b>”


- ss predict 3 things Hoa wants
from the post office.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the dialogue and
check their open predictions


- T gets feed back.


- ss read the dialogue again and
answer comprehension questions


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss work in pairs to make a dialogue
using these guides



Eg:


S1: I’d like some envelopes and
postcards.


S2: here you are, Is that all ?


S1: I want to send this letter to the
USA. How much is this ?


S2: ………..


<b>8</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Pre-reading</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a local stamp: phong b×
- a writinf pad: tem th
- a phone card: tiền trả lại
- overseas mail: göi th


“<b> Slap the board </b>”


<b>2. Open Prediction</b>



- Three things Hoa wants from the post
office.


<b>II. While-Reading</b>


<b> 1. checking prediction. B2.P84</b>


<i><b>Answer key</b></i>


<b> </b>a. some local stamps


b. some stamps of overseas mail
c. a phone card


<b> 2. Comprehension questions. B2.P84</b>
<b>- </b>Questions: a -> c.


<b>III. Post-Reading.</b>


<b>1. Speaking. (Mapped dialogue)</b>
<b>* Eg:</b>




… some envelopes… Here … Is … all


… send .. letter .. USA


How much … ? 9,500 dong.


30,000 dong phone card


How much …. Altogether 45,000 dong.
Thank you …. Welcome.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/12/2009


Teaching : 14/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 52</b>



<b>Unit 8 Places</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B 4,5.P85</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for details to get
further in post office vocab and telling the price ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening skill development



3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and make 2 sentences about the
distance.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T lets ss play game.


<b>slap the board</b>


“ ”


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to look at the pictures


B4.P85 and predict what Mrs


Robinson will buy first and second....
- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss listen and check their predictions
about the order.


- ss listen and check the price.
- T gets feed back.


- ss work in pairs to ask answer
questions


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss answer the questions a -> d on
page 85.


<b>5</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Warm up</b>



<b> * slap the board.</b>


<b>- </b>Mail stamp phone
Post card Envelope send


<b> </b>
<b>II. Pre-listening.</b>


<b>1. Open Prediction</b>


- Predict what Mrs Robinson will buy
+ First:


+ Second:


<b> - </b>Predict how much she spends on each
of these five items


<b>II. While-Listening</b>


<b> 1. checking prediction. B4,5. P85</b>


<i><b>Answer key</b></i>


<b> </b>1- envelopes
2- a pen


3- a writing pad
4- stamps



5- a phone card.
<b>2</b>. <b>Check the price.</b>


<b>Answer key</b>


- Envelope: 2000Dong
- a pen: 1.500dong


- a writing pad: 3000dong
- stamps: 500dong / each
- a phone card: 50.000dong


<b> 3. Comprehension questions. B4,5.P85</b>
<b>- </b>what is the total cost ?


<b>- </b>How much change will Mrs Robinson have
from 60.000 dong ?


<b>III. Post-listening.</b>


<b>1. Speaking. (pairswork.)B5.P85</b>
<b>* Eg:</b>


- how much is it to mail a local letter in
Viet Nam ?


- It is about 1.200 dong.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 05/12/2009


Teaching : 15/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 53</b>



<b>Semester Revision</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to systematise the
knowledge from unit 1 to unit 8 and review grammar structures from unit 1 to unit 8.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocabulary and make 2 sentences about the
distance.


- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


Teacher’s and Ss’ activities <b>Time</b> The contents


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T retells the form and usage of
present simple tense


- T asks ss to give example
- T retells the form and usage of
present progressive tense


- T asks ss to give example


<b>13</b>’ <b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b> 1. The present simple tense.</b>
- Eg: He watches TV after school.


- I go to school by bike.


<b>Form: S + V(es,s) + N ...</b>


<b>2. Present progressive tense.</b>


Eg: they are learning English now.


<b>- </b>Form:



<b>S + tobe + V-ing + N ...</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- T retells question words.


- T asks ss to give some examples.


- T retells form and usage of
future simple tense.


- T gives some examples


- T explains and gives form,
how to use this structure


- T gives examples


- T gives structures and
explains how to use these
structures


- T gives model sentences


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss do these exercises


- Ss do these exercises.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss do these exercises.


- ss give the correct form of
these verbs.


- T asks ss to ordering these
words or phrases to complete
sentences.


<b>18</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>Eg: </b>how far is it from your house to school ?
- what


- when
- why
- which
- where


- how far / how much / how many...
<b>4. future simple</b>


- Eg: I will go to Ha Long bay next
summer.


- form: S + will + V(infi) + N...
<b>5. Comparison.</b>



a. Comparative.


- Short adjective: adj + er + than
- Long adjective: more + adj + than
b. Superlative.


- Short adjective: the adj + est ...
- Long adjective: the most + adj ....
<b>6. modal verbs: ( suggestion)</b>
Eg: Let’s go swimming


- would you like to play volleyball ?
Form:


S + modal + V(infi) + N ...
<b>II. Practice:</b>


<b>1. The present simple.</b>


- Exercise 2 and 3, 4 in Workbook Page 7-8
<b>2. Present progressive tense.</b>


- Exercise 7 P.10 and EX 1,2,3 page 20.


<b> 3. Future simple tense</b>


- Ex 1,2,3 P13-14 in workbook.
<b>4. Comparisons.</b>


- Ex 5,6,7,8,9 P. 16-19 in workbook.


<b>5. Modal verbs </b>


- Ex 7 P33 in workbook.
<b>6. Wh-quesions</b>


- Ex 1-5 P 27-31 in workbook.
- Ex 1, 2 P45 in text book.


<b>III. Production.</b>


<b>1. Give the correct form of these verbs in</b>
<b>brackets.</b>


<b>a. what (do) your father do ?</b>
<b>b. He ( be ) playing marbles</b>
<b>c. Ba ( go ) to school by bike.</b>
<b>d. what time does He ( get ) up ?</b>
<b>e. Minh is ( study ) math. </b>


<b> 2. Ordering the words to complete these</b>
<b>sentences.</b>


<b>a. I / a student / am / in / class 7A.</b>
<b>b. your / what / address ? / is</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>from </b>


<b>d. they / playing / are / soccer.</b>


<b>e. we / more hours / work / than Hoa.</b>


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 10/12/2009



Teaching : 22/12/2009

<b> </b>


<b>Period 54. </b>



<b>Semester written test.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Preparation: 01/01/2010


Teaching : 04/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 55</b>



<b>Unit 9 At home and away</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1.P86-87</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about vacation
activities using “ was, were, and some irregular verbs in the past simple tense”


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> </b>
<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by “<b>Matching</b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits A1.P86


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss make sentences using these
words.


- Example exchange
S1: how were the people ?
S2: they were friendly.


- ss read the dialogue again and
number these sentences.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss play game by asking Y/N
questions to their friend.


<b>12</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- an aquarium: bể , hồ nuôi cá
- a souvenir: đồ kỉ niệm
- a gift: quà tặng


- is/ are -> was / were: là, thì, ở
- have -> had: có


- go -> went: ®i
- buy -> bought: mua


“<b> Matching </b>”


<b>2. Presentation text. A1.P86</b>


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Word cue drill.</b>
<b>* Eg:</b>


- Vacation / wonderful
- Nha Trang / beautiful
- Food / delicious
- Things / expensive


Eg: the people were friendly


<b>2. Number the sentences. Ex1.P 87</b>


Answer key.


1- d 2- c 3- e 4- b 5- a
III. Production.


 Guessing game


- Last vacation, I was in ……
- S1: were you in …….


- S2: yes, I was / no, I wasn’t


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/01/2010


Teaching : 05/01/2010

<b> </b>



<b>Period 56</b>



<b>Unit 9 At home and away</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2.P87-88</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read for details about
the Robinson’s vacation and practice “wh question in the past simple tense”


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and make 2 sentences with past simple tense.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>



<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i>


ss play game


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and


<b>5</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Worm up. </b>
<b> * </b>Pelmanism.


Go have buy take Talk


bought went took talked had


<b>II. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by



“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”
- T sets the scene and elicits A2.P87
- ss match this table.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss read the text and do T/F
statements


- ss read the dialogue again and
answer these questions.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss look at the pictures.P88 to tell the
story of The Robinsons’ Trip to Tri
Nguyen aquarium


- ss write story at home.


<b>18</b>’


<b>8</b>’


- a dolphin: c¸ heo
- a turtle:con rïa biĨn
- exit: lèi ra


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”



<b>2. Presentation text. A1.P86</b>


 Matching.


Eat See wear think


saw ate thought wore


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. T/F statements.</b>


a. The Robinsons went to Tri Nguyen
aquarium


b. they saw many types of fish
c. Liz bought a little turtle
d. they had lunch at a foodstall
e. they ate fish and crab.


Answer key


1.T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F
<b>2. Questions. Ex2.P 88</b>


a -> f
III. Production.


1. Recall:



- Pictures: a – b – c – d – e .P 88
2. Write it up.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

………


….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/01/2010


Teaching : 06/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 57</b>



<b>Unit 9 At home and away</b>



<b>Lesson 3. A3-4.P89-90</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for detail and
further practice past simple tense and read about Ba’s diary to understand the details
and talk about past activities.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’



<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and make 2 sentences with past simple tense.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


- T asks ss to predict which
sentences are T and which ones
are F.


<b>12</b>’ <b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- peanut: ®Ëu phéng



- calm & peace: thanh bình & yên tĩnh
- (to) keep in touch: giữ liên l¹c


- stamp colection: su tập tem
- (to) stop -> stopped: dừng lại
- (to) drive -> drove: lái xe
- (to) arrive -> arrived: đến


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<b>2. T/F statements Prediction.</b>


a. The Robinsons are American


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

- T gets feed back.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss read the text. A4.P89 and check
their T/F statements prediction.




- ss make questions to these sentences.
- ss read these sentences a-g in A4.P90
and make them true.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>



- ss listen to the teacher and tick the
sentences in this table.


- ss listen and complete the
following paragrahp


- T gets feed back.
- T corrects them.


<b>16</b>’


<b>10</b>’


d. They moved to a new apartment last week
e. Liz and Ba are the same age.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Checking T/F statements.</b>


Answer key


1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T
<b>2. Answer Given. </b>


a. Robinsons arrived in HN this year.
b. He is a teacher of English


c. Last week



d. They like playing and talking together.
<b>3. Make sentences True</b>.


<b>III. Production</b>.
1. Listening:


 Fill in the table.


<b>sentence</b> <sub>a</sub> <sub>b</sub> <sub>c</sub> <sub>d</sub> <sub>e</sub> <sub>f</sub> <sub>g</sub> <sub>h</sub> <sub>i</sub> <sub>j</sub>


<b>Listen</b> <sub>v</sub> <sub>v</sub> <sub>v</sub> <sub>v</sub> <sub>v</sub>


 Gap fill.


Liz was excited as the bus …(1) through
the countryside. Everything …(2) calm
and peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus …(3)
at a small roadside restaurant…


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Preparation: 03/01/2010


Teaching : 11/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 58</b>



<b>Unit 9 At home and away</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1-2.P92-93</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>



1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice the past
simple tense in negative and Interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past
activities.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and make 2 sentences with past simple tense.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1</b></i>


ss play game



<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits B1.P92
- ss practice the models.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss read the dialogue and
complete this grid.


<b>5</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>I. Worm up. </b>
<b> * </b>Pelmanism.


<b>come</b> <b>wear</b> <b>look</b> <b>receive</b> <b>improve</b>


<b>wore</b> <b>looked</b> <b>came</b> <b>improved</b> <b>received</b>


<b>II. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a hair dresser : thợ cắt tóc
- a dress maker : thợ may
- a neighbor : hàng xóm
- material : nguyên liệu
- (to) look : trông


- hair : m¸i tãc


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<b>2. Presentation text. B1.P92</b>


 <b>Model sentence</b>


<b>A: </b>Did Hoa buy the dress ?


<b>B:</b> No, she didn’t


<b>A:</b> Did her aunt cut her hair ?


<b>B:</b> Yes, she did.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


1. Grid and form.



<b>Things to do</b> <b>Hoa</b> <b>Hoa s</b>’


<b>neighbor</b> <b>Hoa saunt</b>’


<b>Buythe material</b> <b>x</b> <b>v</b> <b>x</b>


<b>Cut the hair</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b> <b>v</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- ss practice in pairs using the
information in the grid


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss play game


<b>8</b>’


<b>Buy the dress</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b> <b>x</b>


<b>2. Speaking. </b>


- S1: Did her neighbor make the dress ?
- S2: Yes, she did.


III. Production.


1. Guessing game:


- Yesterday I went to …. And I bought a





S1: Did you go to ….?
S2: Did you buy ….. ?


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 05/01/2010


Teaching : 14/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 59</b>



<b>Unit 9 At home and away</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B3-4.P93-94</b>
<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>


<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and make 2 sentences with past simple tense.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits B3.P93
- T asks ss to order these sentences in
the correct order.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>



- ss read the text and check their
order.


- Ss play game by answering
these questions.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss retell how Hoa did the sewing
work using the information in B4. P94.


<b>12</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a hobby : thợ cắt tóc


- a sewing machine : thợ may
- a cushion : hàng xãm


- (to) try -> tried : nguyªn liƯu
- (to) sew : trông


- (to) decide -> decided : mái tóc


- skirt (n): váy ngắn


- Pretty (adj): xinh p


<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<b>2. Pre-reading.</b>


<b>* Ordering statements</b>


a. First, she made a cushion
b. next she made a skirt


c. Hoa bought some materials
d. Hoa’s neighbor helped her
e. she tried on


f. it fitted her well
g. it was too big.


<b>II. While-reading.</b>
<b>1. Read and check.</b>


Answer key.


1.c 2.a 3.b 4.e 5.g 6.d 7.f
<b>2. Noughts & crosses. </b>


B3. P93 questions a -> i



<b>III. Post - reading</b>.
* Recall:


- B4. P 94.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 05/01/2010


Teaching : 15/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 60</b>



<b>Language focus 3. P95-98</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice further in the
- Past simple tense,


- Preposition of place


- “How much/ how far” to talk about price and distance.
- Comparatives with more, less and fewer.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and retells the form usage
of past simple tense.


- T asks ss to give some more
examples.


- T gives and retells some prepositions
of places.


- T retells the form and the usage of
these structure.


<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>
- ss do exercise 3.P97.


- ss do exercise 1.P95



<b>12</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b> 1. Past simple tense.</b>


a. with “Tobe”


- Eg: I was a worker 5 years ago.
(+<b>) </b>S + was/ were + (a/an) + N.
(-) S + wasn’t / weren’t + (a/an) + N
(?) Was / Were + S + (a/an) + N ?
b. With verbs.


- Eg: I went to Ha Long Bay last summer.
(+) S + V(ed,P1) + N + adv.


(-) S + didn’t + V(infi) + N + adv.
(?) Did + S + V (infi) + N + adv ?


<b>2. Preposition of place.</b>


- near : ë gÇn


- beside = next to : ở bên cạnh
- opposite : đối diện



- between : ở giữa
- behind : ở đằng sau


- to the right >< to the left. Phía bên
phải >< Phía bên trái


<b>3. How much.</b>


- Eg: how much is the violet dress ?
- It is 35.000dong


 How much is this ?


 How much are these ?


<b>4. How far.</b>


- Eg: how far is it from your house to
school ?


- It is about 3 kilometers.


 How far is it from A to B ?


 It is about + km.


<b>5. Comparative: </b>


- There is less / fewer N ……
are more



<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b> 1. Past simple.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

- ss work in pairs to ask and
answer using the information in
2b.P96


- ss complete the following
sentences using more, less, or
fewer.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss listen and name each store:
Answer key.


1. shoestore
2. bookstore
3. hairdresser’s
4. clothing store
5. restaurant
6. mini-mart.


<b>6</b>’


<b>2. How much. </b>


Eg: how much is the red shirt ?


It is 22.000dong.


- Ex 1b.P95


<b>3. How far.</b>


- Eg: how far is it from clothing store to
the book store ?


It is about 450 meters
- Ex. 2b.P96


<b>4. Comparative.</b>


- Eg: now there is less meat.
- Ex. 5.P98


<b>III. Production</b>.
* Listening:


- There is a library on Le Loi street. To
the left of the library there is a shoestore.
To the right of the library there is a
bookstore. The hairdresser’s is next to
the bookstore on the right. There is a
clothingstore opposite the shoestore….


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.


- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

Preparation: 10/01/2010



Teaching : 18/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 61</b>

<b>Unit 10 health and hygiene</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1.P99-100 Personal hygiene</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a letter to
understand the datails about Hoa and her family.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in language focus 3.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:



<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


“<b> Matching</b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits A1.P99
- T asks ss to order these sentences in
the correct order.


<b>11</b>’ <b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- a harvest : mïa vô
- (to) iron : là


- helpful (adj) : hữu ích


- (to) work hard : làm việc vất vả
- (to) hope : hi vọng


- (to) recieve : nhËn


- probaly (adv): cã thÓ


“<b> Matching </b>”


<b>2. Pre-reading.</b>


<b>* Ordering statements</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss read the text and check their
order.


- Ss work in pairs to make
questions to these answers.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- T asks and answer about Hoa’s
mom’s letter, using the answer given
and questions a-> e.P100 to make
questions and answers.


<b>20</b>’


<b>7</b>’


week.



d. I miss you a lot.
e. Don’t forget to write


f. Your granddad talks about you a lot.


<b>II. While-reading.</b>


<b>1. Read and check. A1.P99</b>


Answer key.


1.a 2.f 3.c 4.b 5.d 6.e
<b>2. Answer given. </b>


a. Because It is almost harvest time


b. Hoa’s grandfather helps them on the farm.
c. They will go after the harvest.


d. she gets up early and does morning
exercise everyday


e. Hoa’s mother wants her to take care of her
self to wash and iron her clothes, not to eat
too much candy and stay up late.


<b>III. Post - reading</b>.


 Questions and answers:


a. why are Hoa’s parents busy ?
b. who helps them on their farm ?
c. when will they go to Ha Noi ?
d. How is Hoa different now ?


e. what does Hoa’s mother want her to
do ?


and what does she want Hoa not to do ?


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


Preparation: 12/01/2010


Teaching : 19/01/2010

<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<b>Lesson 2. A2-3.P100-101 Personal hygiene</b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to a text about
the routine to revise past simple tense.


<b> </b>2. Skills : writing and listening, reading skills development
3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.


- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss come to the bb to write down
as many the past tense of


irregular verbs as they can.
- T checks .


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Slap the board </b>


“ ”


- T sets the scene and elicits A2.P100
- T asks ss to predict the orders of


Hoa’s activities.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>
- ss listen and check their


predictions


- Ss tells what Hoa did yesterday,
using the pictures.P100


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


<b>3</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>


D Z S E N T E X


I K A J C B D G


D O W C K A A A



B O U G H T M W


N T N E W E R E


<b>II. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) polish: trang điểm
- (to) change : thay đổi


- (to) have a shower/ bath : tắm
- (to) comb : chải đầu


- pants : qun di
- sandals: đôi dép


“<b> Slap the board </b>”


<b>2. Ordering.</b>


<b>1- 2- 3- 4- </b>
<b>5- 6- 7- </b>
<b>8-II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Listen and check their prediction. </b>
<b>A2.P100</b>


Answer key.


1.a 2.e 3.f 4.d 5.g 6.c 7.h 8.b


<b>2. Pictures story. </b>


Example:


- Yesterday Hoa got up, She took a shower
and put on her clothes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- ss write about what they did
yesterday based on Hoa’s activities
and Nam’s diary.


 A3.P101


- Transformation writing.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 15/01/2010


Teaching : 21/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 63</b>

<b>Unit 10 health and hygiene</b>



<b>Lesson 3. A4.P102 </b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a letter to reply
and talk about routine and hygiene.



<b> </b>2. Skills : writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T Presents the letter in A4.P102
- T elicits these sentences and asks ss
to talk about Hoa’s Mom’s letter.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss read the text and complete
the letter.



- Ss work in groups of 4 to write
the complete letter.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss put their posters on the
board/ wall and comparing
their work.


- Ss write a rely letter to their
penpal and telling what they do
everyday.


<b>6</b>’


<b>22</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Recall.</b>


a. Did Hoa get a letter from her mom ?
b. Will her mom visit her after the harvest ?
c. Can Hoa take care of her self ?


d. Does she get up early every morning ?
e. Does she go to bed late ?



f. Will she write to her mom soon ?


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Gap-fill. A4.P102</b>


Answer key.


1. was 2. having 3. show 4. take 5. get
6. go 7. wash 8. iron 9. eating


10. told 11. see 12. go


<b>2. Writing. </b>
<b>III. Production</b>.


 <i><b>Exhibition</b></i>.


 <i><b>Transformation writing</b></i>.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 17/01/2010


Teaching : 25/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 64</b>

<b>Unit 10 health and hygiene</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1,4. A bad toothache.</b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>



1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to read a dialogue about
a visit to the dentist and practice speaking using Qs “ why – because” to talk about
causes.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>
- ss play game.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>



- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Slap the board </b>


“ ”


- T sets the scene and elicits B1.P103


<b>3</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Warm up.</b>
<b> * Hangman.</b>


<b>T O O T H A C H E ( 9 letters )</b>
<b>II. Presentation.</b>


<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) hurt -> hurt : bị đau


- (to) understand -> understood : hiểu


- (to) feel -> felt : c¶m thÊy


- (to) fill : hàn răng
- scared : (adj) sợ hÃi
- cavity : (n) lỗ sâu răng
- a dentist : (n) nha sĩ


<b> Slap the board </b>”


<i><b>2.</b></i> <b>T/F statements prediction.</b>


a<b>. </b>Minh has a toothache


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- T asks ss to predict which sentences
are T and which ones are F.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>
- ss read and check their


predictions


- Ss read again and answer the
questions B1.P103


- ss practice speaking in a role
- Half and half


- Open / close pairs



<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss walk around the class to ask
and answer to find who …
- Example Exchange:


S1: Do you have a toothache ?
S2: Yes / No…


<b>20</b>’


<b>5</b>’


c. Minh likes to go to the dentist.
d. The dentist is kind


e. Hoa’s teeth still hurts her


f. Minh is not scared after talking with
Hoa.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Check prediction. B1.P103</b>


Answer key.


a.T b.F c.F d.T e.F f.T



<b>2. comprehension questions. </b>


* B1.P103


<b>3. Word cue drill. B4.P105</b>


<b> </b>- Minh’s tooth / hurt / have / cavity
- He / nervous / see / dentist


- cavity / not serious / small
- he / happy / teeth / ok.


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Find some one who.


Find some one who Name


… has a toothache


… likes going to the dentist


… is scared of seeing a dentist.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 17/01/2010


Teaching : 27/01/2010

<b> </b>



<b>Period 65</b>

<b>Unit 10 health and hygiene</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B2-3. A bad toothache.</b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen and read for the
details about Dr Lai’s job to revise the present simple tense.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>



<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Matching </b>


“ ”


<b>6</b>’ <b>I. Pre-teach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) explain : gi¶i thÝch
- (to) remind : nh¾c nhë
- (to) check : kiĨm tra
- (to) smile : mØm cêi


- a surgery : (n) cuéc phÉu thuËt
- (to) note : chó ý


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


- T sets the scene and elicits B1.P103
- T asks ss to predict the answer of
these questions.



- T gets feed back.


- ss read and think of these
questions.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>
- ss listen and check their


predictions


- listen and answer these
questions


- Ss read B3.P104 and make
questions to these answers.


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss walk around the class to ask
and answer to find who …
- Example Exchange:


S1: Do you have a toothache ?
S2: Yes / No…


<b>8</b>’


<b>18</b>’



<b>6</b>’


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. Open predictions. B2</b>


a<b>. -> d</b>


<b>2. Pre-questions. </b>


a. How does Dr Lai help Minh ?
b. How does Minh feel ?


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Listening. B2.P104</b>


Listen and answer.


<b>2. Answer given. B3.P104</b>


a. He has one small cavity.
b. she fills the cavity in his tooth
c. He is very pleased


d. She advises Minh to brush his teeth
regularly





<b>III. Production.</b>


 Complete the story.B3.P104
Answer key.


Scared looks cavity brush happy


 Recall.


- retelling the story.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 17/01/2010


Teaching : 28/01/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 66</b>

<b>Revision</b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to review past simple
tense and some structures as: why – because


- how far and preposition of place.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>



<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T retells these structures and the
use of past simple tense


- T asks ss to give example for
each structure.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.


<b>12</b>’


<b>5</b>’



<b>5</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b>1. The past simple tense</b>


a<b>. Tobe</b>


<b> (+) S + was/ were + a/ an + N</b>


<b> (-) S + was / were + not + a/ an + N</b>
<b> (?) Was / were + S + a/ an + N ?</b>
<b>b. Verbs.</b>


<b> (+) S + V(ed,P1) + N + adv</b>


<b> (-) S + didn t + V(infi) + N + adv</b>’


<b> (?) Did + S + V(infi) + N + adv ?</b>
<b>2. Why - because. </b>


Eg: why does Minh’s tooth hurt ?
Because he has a cavity.


<b>3. Preposition of place.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


- T asks ss to do this exercise by
giving the correct form of these verbs


to complete sentences


- ss do the exercise 2 a in text book. P
96


- ss make sentences in Ex4. P105


<b>16</b>’


- to the left: bên trái to the right: bên phải
- in front of: đằng trớc behind: đằng sau


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Complete the sentences</b>


a. I ( play ) volleyball last week.


b. Yesterday, I ( visit ) my grand mother.
c. Last month, my mom ( buy ) me a new
bike


d. my dad ( work ) in Hue a few years ago
e. my family ( go ) to QN last summer.
<b>2. Preposition.</b>


a. Ex 2 a in the text book
<b>3. Why </b>–<b> because.</b>


- Ex 4.P105



<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 21/01/2010


Teaching : 02/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 67</b>

<b>Unit 11 keep fit & stay healthy</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen to the dialogue
to understand the details and practice “ would you + V …”


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.


- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss play game


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Rub out & remember</b>


“ ”


- ss predict to put the statements a ->
h.P108 into correct order.


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- T sets the scene and elicits A1.P108


- T asks ss to listen and check their
prediction


- T gets feed back.


- ss read or listen again and answer
these questions.


- T asks ss to compare in pairs
- T gets feedback.


<b>4</b>’


<b>11</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>I. Warm up</b>


<b> * Pelmanism.</b>


<b>give</b> <b>take</b> <b>Tell</b> <b>leave</b> <b>have</b> <b>tobe</b> <b>Buy</b>
<b>had</b> <b>was</b> <b>left</b> <b>gave</b> <b>took</b> <b>told</b> <b>bought</b>


<b>II. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) measure : đo đạc


- (to) weigh : cân nặng
- mouth : miệng
- height : chiều cao


- temperature : (n) nhiệt độ


- a medical check-up : KiÓm tra sk
- a medical record : phiÕu kh¸m sk


“<b> Rub out & remember </b>”


<b> 2. Ordering prediction. A1.P108</b>
<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Listen and check. A1.P108</b>


Answer key.


1.f 2.d 3.c 4.g 5.e 6.a 7.h 8.b
<b>2. Comprehension questions. A1.P108</b>


a. what was the ss of QT school doing ?
b. who was doing the medical check up?
c. what did the nurse do ?


d. what was Hoa’s temperature? Was it
normal ?


e. what was her height ?



f. what was her weight? / how heavy was
she ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss play game by making sentences
with: “ would you + V(infi) … please?
And response.


- Eg:


- S1: would you open your
mouth, please ?


- S2: ok ….


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Noughts and crosses.
đo thân nhiệt Quay lại vào


tuần sau Cho biết tên
Ngồi xuống Kiểm tra cânnặng phiếu khámđiền vào


sk
Núi Ah i trong


phòng chê ®o chiỊu cao.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’



- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 27/01/2010


Teaching : 03/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 68</b>

<b>Unit 11 keep fit & stay healthy</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2-3 - a check up.P108</b>



<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for the details
and practice asking & answering about height and weight.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>



<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Matching </b>


“ ”


- ss predict the missing words in
A2.P108


<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


- ss listen and check their predictions.
- T gets feed back.


- ss practice the dialogue.


- ss work in pairs to ask and
answer questions to fill in the
medical record using these
questions.



<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss walk around the class to ask
answer to fill in the table.
- T gets feedback.


<b>8</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>I. Pre-teach.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) : weigh: cân nặng


= what is your weight ? bạn nặng bao nhiêu
- Heavy : nặng


= how heavy are you ? bạn nặng bao nhiêu
- male : nam, đàn ông


- feamle : nữ, đàn bà


- what is your height : bạn cao bao nhiêu
- how tall are you ? : bạn cao bao nhiêu


“<b> Matching </b>”



<b>2. Open Prediction. A2.p108</b>


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Check Open predictions. A2.P108</b>
<b>Answer key.</b>


1. ask 2. how 3. your 4. 50
5. shorter 6. me 7. tall 8. meter
9. centimeters 10. will 11. nurse


12. height 13. think 14 no 15. form


<b>2. A3.P108</b>


a. which school/class does He study ?
b. what’s his surname / forename ?
c. what’s his address ?


d. How old is He ?


e. what’s is his Height / weight ?


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Survey.


<b>Name</b> <b>Male/ female</b> <b>Age</b> <b>weight</b> <b>Height</b>



<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 01/01/2010


Teaching : 04/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 69</b>

<b>Unit 11 keep fit & stay healthy</b>



<b>Lesson 3. B1 </b>–<b> what was wrong with you.P110</b>


<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask and answer


questions about sicknesses and further practice past simple question forms and negative
forms.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and work book


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:



<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.


- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Rub out & remember </b>


“ ”


<b>10</b>’ <b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) have a bad cold: bị cảm lạnh
a headache: đau đầu
a virus: cảm cúm


a stomachache: bị đau dạ dầy


<b>- </b>(to) have a flu: bị cúm


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

- T elicits and presents the dialogue
- T asks ss to give model sentences


- T does the concept check


- ss copy down


<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


- ss practice using model sentences
that they have learnt.


- ss practice in a role:
- T – the whole class
- Half – half


- Open and close pairs


- ss practice speaking the dialogue.
- ss read the dialogue and answer
the questions a -> e.P110


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- ss play game by giving the
correct form of these verbs.
a. the weather (be) awful today
b. Lan (be) sick yesterday


c. She (not/come) to school yesterday.
d. How… you (feel) now ?


e. She (walk) to school every day.


..


………


<b>20</b>’


<b>8</b>’


“<b> Rub out & remember </b>”


<b>2.Presentation Dialogue. B1.P110</b>
<b>Model sentences</b>


 <b>What was wrong with you ?</b>
<b>- I had a headache</b>


 <b>What was wrong with her ?</b>
<b>- She had a stomachache.</b>
<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Wordcue drill. </b>


- You/ a cold Ba/ stomach ache
- Lan / a headache She / tooth ache
- He / flu


Eg. S1: what was wrong with you ?
S2: I had a cold….


<b>2. Practice speaking.</b>



B1.P110


<b>3. Comprehension questions.</b>


a -> e .P110


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Noughts and crosses.


<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b>


4 5 6


7 8 9


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………


….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 01/01/2010


Teaching : 09/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 70</b>

<b>Unit 11 keep fit & stay healthy</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B2-3 what was wrong with you. P111</b>


<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for specific
information and more practice speaking about diseases.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and speaking skills development



3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and work book


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss work in groups of 4 to ask
answer questions to fill in the table.
- Ss predict the days lost through
sickness in class 7A last semester.


<i><b>2. Activity 2</b></i>


- T asks secretaries in some groups to
give their group’s result



- T asks ss to listen and check their
predictions.


- T gets feed back


<b>10</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>I. Pre-teach.</b>
<b> </b>


<b> 1. Survey.B2.P111</b>


- Qs 1: Were you ever absent from school ?
- Qs 2: Were you sick ?


- Qs 3: Did you have a cold/ flu / … ?


<b> 2. Open Prediction. B3.P111</b>


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Check ss survey. B2.P111</b>’


<b>2. Listen and check.P111</b>
<b>Answer key.</b>


a. cold: 10


b. head ache: 05
c. tooth ache: 17
d. Flu: 43


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>
- ss compare the days lost


through sickness in class 7A
with those in their own class.


<b>8</b>’ f. total days lost: 112<b>III. Production.</b>


 Example:


- Last semester in class 7a cold caused
10 day’s absent but in my class ……..


<b>co</b>


<b>ld</b> <b><sub>fl</sub>u</b>


<b>h</b>


<b>ea</b>


<b>d</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>ch</b>



<b>e</b>


<b>st</b>


<b>o</b>


<b>m</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>ch</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>ch</b>


<b>e</b>


<b>to</b>


<b>o</b>


<b>th</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>ch</b>


<b>e</b>



<b>to</b>


<b>ta</b>


<b>l</b>


<b>Class</b>
<b>7A</b>
<b>Your</b>
<b>class</b>


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

Preparation: 01/01/2010


Teaching : 09/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 71</b>

<b>Unit 11 keep fit & stay healthy</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B 4 what was wrong with you. P113</b>


<b>I . The aims. </b>


1. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more vocab
about disease and read a text to understand the details about the common cold.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.


2. Students: English 7, notebook, and work book


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the old lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- T asks 3ss to come to the bb to write vacab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss come to the bb to write as many
adj as they can find.


- bad, cold, sick


- illness, weight, virus, feel, flu
- temperature, head ache


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus and
individually.



- Ss copy down in their notebook.
- T checks by


<b>Rub out & remember</b>


“ ”


<i><b>3. Activity 3</b></i>


- Ss read the text and match these
English words in column A with their
Vietnames meaning in column B.
- T gets feed back.


<b>4</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>I. Warm up</b>


<b> *</b> Wordsquare.


T H G J E W Z R


E X B S U R I V


M I L L N E S S



P K O F D J F K


E H C A D A E H


R F B I Q Z E E


A L C L S W L I


T U R E J T H C


<b>II. Pre-teach</b>
<b> 1. Vocab.</b>


- (to) cough : ho
- (to) sneeze : hắt hơi
- (to) cure : cứu chữa


- common cold : cảm thông thường
- disease: (n) bệnh tật


- symptom: triệu chứng
- a runny nose : bệnh sổ suýt
- a light fever: sốt nhẹ


“<b> Rub out & remember </b>”


<b>III. Practice.</b>


<b>1. Reading. B4.P112</b>



* Matching


A B


Unpleasant Biến mất


Relieve Khó chịu


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

- ss read again and answer these
questions a -> e.P112


<i><b>4. Activity 4</b></i>


- ss write about the common cold
using the information in the text.


<b>6</b>’


Prevent Hồi phục


<b>2. Comprehension Question.P112</b>


a. why do we call the cold “common” ?
b. what are the symptom of common cold?
c. Is there a cure for the common cold ?
d. Do cold cures work ?


e. How can you help prevent a cold ?



<b>III. Production.</b>


 Write it up.


- Eg: a common cold is a disease, Its
symptoms are runny nose, a slight fever,
coughing …..


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- T asks ss to do exercises in work book at home.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 18/02/2010



Teaching : 23/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 72 </b>



<b>The written test 45</b>



<b>I.</b> The aims.


- To help ss to systematize the content from unit 9 to unit 11 and review grammar:
+ Past simple tense


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

+ question form and vocab about diseases.
II. The content


<b>1. Questions.</b>


<i><b>1. Question 1. circle the best answer.</b></i>



1. Yesterday, I ….. to vistit my grandmother.


a. goes b. went c. go


2. where …. you buy that dress, last week ?


a. does b. do c. did


3. what … the matter with Minh ?


a. Is b. Are c. was


4. why does Minh’s tooth hurt ? because He …. a cavaty


a. have b. has c. had


5. how heavy ….. you ?


a. do b. does c. are


<i><b>2. Question 2. put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.</b></i>
<i><b>1.</b></i> Lan ( have ) a bad cold, yesterday.


<i><b>2.</b></i> what ( be ) your height ?


<i><b>3.</b></i> What time ( do ) you get up, yesterday ?


<i><b>4.</b></i> my mother ( buy ) me a new bike, last week


<i><b>5.</b></i> How much ( be) the green dress ?



<i><b>3. Question 3. Match the questions in column A with their answers in column B.</b></i>


<b> A </b>B
1. what is your weight ? a. He had a bad cold


2. what was wrong with Minh ? b. one meter 45 centimeters
3. how tall are you ? c. I’m 42 kilos


4. why didn’t Lan go to school, yesterday ? d. Yes, I was


5. were you sick ? e. because She was sick.


<i><b>4. Question 4. Read the passage and answer these questions below.</b></i>


Last week, Minh and his family went to Ha Long Bay. They spent 3 days there. On the
first day, They visited some caves such as : Dau Go, Sung Sot … and the next day they went
shopping at Hon Gai market. His mother bought him a T-shirt, his father bought him a cap.
They came back home at 7:00 pm on the third day.


Questions.


1. Where did Minh’s family go, last week ?
2. How long did they stay there ?


3. What did they visited on the first day ?
4. What did his father buy him ?


5. What time did they come back home ?



<b>2. Answer keys and points. </b>


* Question1(2,5p): 1. b 2. c 3. a 4. b 5. c


* Question 2(2,5p): 1. c 2. a 3. b 4. e 5. d


* Question 3(2,5p): 1. had 2. is 3. did 4. bought 5. is
* Question 4 (2,5p): 1. His family went to Halong Bay


2. They spent there for 3 days
3. They visited some caves
4. He bought Minh a cap


5. They came back home at 7:00 pm.


<b>3. Result and percent</b>


Total of students: …………. Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation</b>


<b>- </b>T comments ss’ attitude and ss’ attention


<b>5. homework.</b>



- Prepare for next lesson.


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 18/02/2010



Teaching : 24/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 73 </b>




<b>Unit 12: Let s eat</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1. What shall we eat ?</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to a text to understand the details and practice
food vocab.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write structures that are used in the writing test.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:



<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i> <b>7</b>’ <b>I. Pre </b>–<b> teach. </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “Rub out and
remember ”


- ss guess what food Hoa and her
aunt bought.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- SS read the text and check their
predictions.


- T gets feed back and corrects
- ss play game by answering these
questions using the information in
the text.


<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss work in groups of 4 to
make real conversation about
shopping.


3’


22’


<b>5</b>’


- spinach: môn khoa học
- a cucumber: ở đằng sau
- a papaya: tiếp tục


- a durian: bắt đầu
- (to) hate: nhận đợc
- (to) smell: Quốc hội
- pork: thịt lợn


- Pine apple: qu¶ døa


“<b> Rub out & Remember</b>”


<b> 2. Open prediction:</b>


<b>- </b>Predict food Hoa and Her aunt bought.



<b>II. Practice. </b>


<b> 1. Listen or read to check their prediciton</b>


<b> 2. Comprehension questions.</b>
<b>* Lucky Numbers.</b>


1.what did Hoa & her aunt buy at the market?
2. LN


3. Does Hoa like pork ? How about her aunt ?
4 – 7 – 10 : Lucky Number.


5. what meat would they like for dinner ?
6. what are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s
aunt ?


8. what fruit did they buy ?


9. why didn’t they buy a papaya ?


<b>III. Production</b>.


 Ss talk about the food they like and
dislike


 Discussion:


- ss work in groups of 4 to make real
conversation.



<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

………
….


………
….



………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 18/02/2010



Teaching : 25/02/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 74 </b>



<b>Unit 12: </b>

<b>Let s eat</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A1- 2. What shall we eat ?</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know how to use this structure:
+ “ Neither, either, so, too”


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook



<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b>1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss come to the bb to write as
many as they can.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T presents the A1.P114 and asks ss
to give model sentences


- T does the concept – check :
+ Form, Use, Meaning…


<b>3</b>’


8’



<b>I. Revision.</b>
<b> - Network.</b>


<b>II. Presentation. </b>


1. A1. Model sentences.


* - S1: I like spinach and cucumbers.
- S2: so do I / I do, too.


* - I don’t like pork.


- neither do I / I don’t like either.


<b>Foo</b>
<b>d</b>


<b>frui</b>
<b>t</b>
<b>vegetab</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss practice speaking in a
role:


+ T – whole class
+ half and half


+ close and open pairs



<i><b>4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss walk around to ask and
answer to fill in the table.
- Eg:


- S1: I like durian, Do you like
them ?


- S2: Yes, I like them, too /
Yes, So do I.


20’


<b>6</b>’


<b>II. Practice. </b>


<b> 1. Picture cue drill.</b>


- carrots / v - pork / x
- papaya / v - spinach / x
- fish / x - durian / v


<b>- </b>S1: I like carrots
S2: so do I / I do, too.


<b>- </b>S1: I don’t like beef.



S2: Neither do I / I don’t like either.


<b>III. Production</b>.


 Survey.


<b>N</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>m</b>


<b>e</b>


<b>D</b>


<b>u</b>


<b>ri</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>n</b>


<b>F</b>


<b>is</b>


<b>h</b>



<b>C</b>


<b>h</b>


<b>ic</b>


<b>k</b>


<b>en</b>


<b>C</b>


<b>u</b>


<b>cu</b>


<b>m</b>


<b>b</b>


<b>er</b>


<b>C</b>


<b>a</b>


<b>rr</b>


<b>o</b>



<b>ts</b>


<b>P</b>


<b>ea</b>


<b>s</b>


Nga


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

Preparation: 20/02/2010



Teaching : 02/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 75 </b>



<b>Unit 12: </b>

<b>Let s eat</b>



<b>Lesson 3. A3- 4. What shall we eat ?</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read a text to understand how to make a


meal.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading and writing skills development
3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember </b>”


- T asks ss to guess the order of the
statements.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- SS read the text and check their
predictions.


- T gets feed back and corrects


<b>11</b>’


<b>23</b>’


<b>I. Pre </b>–<b> teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.
- a bowl: cái bát
- a dish: cỏi a


- soy-sauce: nớc xì dầu


- (to) boil: luéc


- (to) slice: th¸i
- (to) stir-fry: r¸n
- (to) add: cho thêm
- (to) heat: đun nóng


<b> Rub out & Remember</b>”


<b> 2. Ordering statements:</b>


a. First, she sliced the beef.


b. Then she cooked some rice and boiled some
spinach.


c. Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner.


d. Next, she sliced some green peppers and
onions


e. and then she set the table with plates, bowls,
dishes, chopsticks, spoons and glasses.


f. After that she heated a pan and stir-fried the
beef.


g. finally, she sliced the cucumbers and made
cucumber salad.



<b>II. Practice. </b>


<b> 1. Read to check their prediciton</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

- ss read again and add the missing
verbs in the blanks in Ex.B.P116
- ss read again and answer the
question A.P116


- ss match the instructions to the
pictures on P.117


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss write what they ate and
drank yesterday…..


<b>4</b>’


<b> 2. Read and do exercise B.P116</b>
<b>* Answer key.</b>


1.slice 2.slice 3.heat 4.stir-fry
5.add 6.boil/ cook 7.add


<b>3. Comprehension question. A3.P116</b>


- What did Hoa, her aunt and uncle have for


dinner ? write the manu.


<b> 4. Matching.</b>


1.c 2.f 3.a 4.d 5.b 6.e 7.g


<b>III. Production</b>.


 Writing. A4.P118.


 Eg:


- For breakfast, I ate …… I drank ….. and
for lunch I …..


For dinner I ……..


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b>5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period.


- SS learn the Vocab by heart and Do exercises in work book.
- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 26/02/2010



Teaching : 03/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 76 </b>




<b>Trả chữa bài kiểm tra 45 </b>



<b>I . The aims</b>


- help ss to have experience from their writing test.


- master how to use past simple tense and some model sentences
- ss will appreciate themselves their level of achievement<b> </b>
<b>II . Preparation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> (5 )</b>’


- T asks ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark.


<b>3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b> 1. Activity1. </b>


- T retells the use and form of
these structures which were used in
the writing test.



- ss listen and copy down.
<b>2. Activity 2. </b>




- Teacher gives the answer key for
ss to compare.


<b>3. Activity 3</b>.


- T corrects some mistakes that ss
often make


<b>4. Activity 4.</b>




- T gets ss’ points and percentages of
ss’ writing test.


<b>4</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>I. The target items that were used in the </b>


<b>writing test. </b>


1. Past simple.


2. some model sentences
a. How much


b. why - because
3. vocab about diseses


<b>II. The answer key and points</b>.


<i><b>1. Question1(2,5p): </b></i>


1. b 2. b 3. a 4. b 5. c


<i><b>2. Question 2(2,5p): </b></i>


1. c 2. a 3. b 4. e 5. d


<i><b>3. Question 3(2,5p): </b></i>


1. had 2. is 3. did
4. bought 5. is


<i><b>4. Question 4 (2,5p): </b></i>


1. His family went to Halong Bay
2. They spent there for 3 days
3. They visited some caves


4. He bought Minh a cap


5. They came back home at 7:00 pm.


<b>III. The mistakes that ss often make</b>


1. third person without adding “s or es”


<b> </b>2. mistaken between present simple and
past simple tense.


3. is / are, bought / buyed, had / haved…


<b>IV. The result of ss writing test.</b>’
Total of students: ………….


Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %
- Good: ……… %
- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 20/02/2010



Teaching : 04/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 77 </b>



<b>Unit 12: </b>

<b>Let s eat</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1. Our food</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read listen for specific information to
understand why Ba had to go to the doctor’s


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.



<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “ <b>Matching</b> ”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to predict which


sentences are True and
which ones are False.
- Ss compare it in pairs
- T gets feed back.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- SS listen to the text and check
their predictions.


- T gets feed back and corrects
- ss listen again and answer these
question B1.P119


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss close their book and
complete the story in B1.P119.


<b>6</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>I. Pre </b>–<b> teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.



- terrible: (adj) kinh khñng
- awful: (adj) khđng khiÕp
- probaly: (adv) cã thĨ
- (to) feel: c¶m thÊy


- medicine: (n) thuèc uèng
- farm: (n) trang tr¹i


<b> Matching</b>“ ”


<b>II. Pre-listening.</b>


<b> 1. T/F statement Prediction.</b>


a. Ba had a headache.
b. He was at the doctor’s.


c. He ate spinach, but his parents didn’t.
d. His mom washed the spinach.


e. Vegetables often have dirt on them
f. That dirt can’t make him sick.


<b>III. While </b>–<b> listening. </b>


<b> 1. Read to check their predicitons.</b>


1.F 2.T 3.T 4.F 5.T 6.F



<b> 2. Comprehension question. </b>


a. what did Ba eat last night ?
b. who washed the spinach ?
c. whydid Ba go to the doctor ?
d. what made him sick ?


<b> </b>


<b>IV. Post - listening</b>.


 Writing. B1.P119.
- Complete the story.


Answer key.
1. doctor’s 7. carefully
2. sick 8. vegetables
3. asked 9. make
4. had 10. she
5. spinach 11. medicine.
6. wash


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.



- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 26/02/2010



Teaching : 08/03/2010

<b> </b>



<b>Period 78 </b>



<b>Unit 12: </b>

<b>Let s eat</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B2,4 Our food</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read comprehension and further practice in
indefinite quuantifiers “ a little, too much, plenty of, lots of ” and further practice with
vocab about food.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out & </b>
<b>remember</b> ”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


<b>6</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>I. Pre </b>–<b> teach. </b>


1. Vocabulary.


- an amount of: (adj) 1 số lợng…
- a diet: (n) chế độ ăn kiêng


- balanced: (adj) cân đối
- moderate: trung bình
- energy: (n) năng lợng
- effect: (n) hiệu quả


- daily product: s¶n phÈm thêng nhËt


<b> Rub out & remember</b>“ ”


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

- T asks ss to predict which
sentences are True and
which ones are False.
- Ss compare it in pairs


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- SS read the text B2.P120 and
check their predictions.


- T gets feed back and corrects
- ss read again and answer these
question B2.P120.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss listen to the T and match
the dishes that they ate and
drank B4.P120.



<b>16</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>What does a balanced diet mean ?</b>“ ”
a. eat a lot of meat.


b. eat a little fruit, vegetables.
c. eat a moderate amount of sugar.
d. Eat a little fatty food.


e. Eat plenty of the food you like.


<b>III. Practice. </b>


<b> 1. Read to check their predicitons.</b>


1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F


<b> 2. Comprehension question. </b>


a. Name two advangtages of eating sugar.


b. Is a balanced diet alone enough for a healthy
lifestyle ? why or why not ?


c. Do you think your diet is balanced ? why ?
why not ?



<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Listening. B4.P120.
Answer key.
- Lan: b, d, f, g


- Ba: c, a, e, h.
- Nga: a, d, g.
- Hoa: b, e, g.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Preparation: 26/02/2010



Teaching : 09/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 79 </b>


<b>Language focus 4.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to further practice in past simple, indefinite
quantifier, “ too, so, either and neither ” and imperatives.



<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


<b> -</b> T elicits and retells these
structures.


- T elicits and models these
expressions


- T retells these structures and


gives more examples


- T asks ss to give some more
examples


- T elicits and models
- T gives some examples.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- ss work in pairs to ask and
answer using the questions
and pictures in
Ex1.p123-124.


<b>14</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>


<b> 1. Past simple tense</b>.
- Yes / No questions.


<b>2. Indefinite quantifiers</b>


- a little: mét Ýt


- a lot of / lots of: nhiÒu
- too much: rÊt nhiÒu



<b> 3. So and neither, too and either.</b>
<b>a. too and either.</b>


- Eg1: I like mangoes
I like mangoes, too.
- Eg: I don’t like eggs.


I don’t like eggs, either.


<b>b. so and neither.</b>


- Eg1: I like mangoes.
So do I.


- Eg2: I don’t like bananas.
Neither do I.


<b> 4. Imperatives</b>


- Eg: + close your book.
+ Open your book…..


<b>III. Practice. </b>


<b>1. Questions and answers.</b>


<b>- </b>Using Y/N questions in Past simple tense to
do Ex 1.P 123.



<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

- Match the correct expression
to each picture in Ex


2a.p124


- complete the dialogues in Ex
2b.p125


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss use the instructions and
pictures in Ex5.P128 to make a
cucumber salad.


<b>5</b>’


<b>b. </b>complete the dialogues in Ex 2b.p125
<b>3. So and neither, too and either.</b>
<b>- Pair work.</b>


- make some similar dialogues with their
partners as Ex 3 and Ex 4.P126, 127


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Writing. Ex5.P128.


- Using the instructions and pictures in


Ex5.P128 to make a cucumber salad.


Answer key.
a. Peel d. mix
b. wash e. add
c. slice f. stir
g. wait


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 06/03/2010



Teaching : 11/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 80 </b>



<b>Unit 13: </b>

<b>Activities</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1,4 Sports</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for comprehension and sports vocab



<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading skill development


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.



- T checks by “<b>Rub out & </b>
<b>remember</b> ”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T sets the scene and elicits
A1.P129


- T asks ss to read A1 and
answer these two questions
- Ss read A4 and answer two


questions and match the
English words with their
Vnese meaning.


- Ss read again and answer the
comprehension questions in
A4.P132


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss walk around to ask their friends
and fill in this table.


<b>9</b>’


<b>23</b>’


<b>5</b>’



<b>I. Presentation. </b>


1. Vocabulary.


- skate-boarding: (n) lít v¸n.


- roller-blading: (n) trợt Patanh có bxe dọc đế
- roller-skating:(n) trợt Patanh có bxe 4 góc
- (to) take part in: tham gia


- a competition: (n) cuộc thi
- (to) win the prize: đoạt giải
- baseball: (n) bãng chµy
- table tennis: (n) bãng bµn


<b> Rub out & remember</b>“ ”


<b>II. Practice.</b>
<b> 1. A1.P129</b>


<b>Comprehension question.</b>


- What’s the most popular sports in the
USA ?


- Which sports is at 11th<sub> position ?</sub>


<b>2. A4.P132.</b>



- what kind of sports in the picture in
A4.P132


- what is WFF and WTS ?


<b>a. </b>Matching.


A B


1. Organised a. T×nh ngun
2. Increase b. Tỉ chøc
3. Volunteer c. thay v×
4. Instead of d. gia tăng
b. Comprehension questions.


- A4.P132


<b>IV. Production.</b>


Find someone who


<b>Name</b> <b>Find someone who likes …. Best.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 06/03/2010



Teaching : 15/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 81 </b>



<b>Unit 13: </b>

<b>Activities</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A3,5 Sports</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice in using adj and adv to talk about
sports.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Reading and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’



- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b> Matching </b>”
- T elicits and models


- T asks ss to practice speaking.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice
speaking.


Eg: He is a good soccer player.
Yes, He plays well.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>



- Ss change adjectives in
brackets in A5.P133 into
adverbs.


- T checks and corrects.


<b>6</b>’


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- skillful -> skillfully: điêu luyện
- slow -> slowly: chËm


- bad -> badly: tåi tÖ


- interesting -> interestingly: thó vÞ
- careful -> carefully: (n) cÈn thËn
- quick -> quickly: nhanh chãng
- careless -> carelessly: cÈu th¶
- sudden -> suddenly: bÊt ngê


“<b> Matching </b>”


<b> 2. Presentation text. A3.P131</b>
<b>Model sentences.</b>



- He is a skillful volleyball player.
- He plays skillfully.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b> 1. Word cue drill. A3.P131</b>
<b> - </b>good / well / soccer player.
<b>- </b>slow / slowly / swimmer.


- Quick / quickly / runner.
- Safe / safely / cyclist
- Bad / badly / tennis player.


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Writing. A5.P133
1. clearly


2. carefully
3. safely
4. carelessly
5. strictly


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’


- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 06/03/2010




Teaching : 16/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 82 </b>



<b>Unit 13: </b>

<b>Activities</b>



<b>Lesson 3. B1,4 Come and play </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen to a text about an invitation and
practice in modal verbs “ can / should / ought to / must ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss find out the vocab that they’ve
learnt about sports & modal verbs
and come to the bb to write them
down.


-> table tennis, swimming,
volleyball, ought to


Must, should, can ….
Soccer, ….


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


<b>8</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>
<b> </b>



<b> * </b> word square


T A B L E T E N N I S


S R A A H


U U R T C O


M S I N N E T U


H A C L


O U G H T T O C D


S W I M M I N G O


V O L L E Y B A L L S


<b>II. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b> Matching </b>”
- T elicits and presents



B1.P134 and gives model
sentences.


- T does the concept-check.
- Ss listen and copy down.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>
- T asks ss to practice


speaking in a role:
- T – whole class
- Half – half


- Open / close pairs


<i><b>4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss complete the passage with
modal verbs in the box in B4.P137.


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


- must = have to: ph¶i


- shouldn’t = ought not to: không nên
- must not: không đợc phép



- a table tennis paddle: (n) vỵt bóng bàn
- can >< can not: có thể >< không thÓ


“<b> Matching </b>”


<b> </b>


<b> 2. Presentation Dialogue. B1.P134</b>
<b>Model sentences.</b>


- What should Nam do before He plays
table tennis ?


- He ought to do his homework.
- He must do his homework first.
+ Form: S + ought to/ must + V(infi) + N.
+ Meaning & Use…


<b>II. Practice.</b>


<b> 1. Word cue drill. A3.P131</b>


<b>- </b>Nam / before / table tennis / do homework


<b>- </b>we / after meals / brush teeth.


<b>-</b> children / when / swimming / swim with an
adult.


<b>-</b> Lan / when / very thin / eat more



<b>-</b> Huong / before / fail her exam / study harder.


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Writing. B4.P137


<i><b>1.</b></i> can 2. must
3. must not 4. should


5. can 6. ought to / should
7. can / should 8. should / must


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 16/03/2010



Teaching : 23/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 83 </b>



<b>Unit 13: </b>

<b>Activities</b>



<b>Lesson 4. A2-B2 Come and play </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice in making, accepting and refusing
an invitation, using modal verbs to practice in sports vocab… ”



<b> </b>2. Skills : Listening and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T sets the scene
- T elicits and models
- ss listen and repeat
- ss practice speaking.


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>



- ss practice speaking the
dialogue.B2.P135


- ss change the underline
details using the information
in the box.


- Ss practice speaking these
dialogues.


- ss draw a table in A2.P130 and
walk around the class to ask and
answer to fill in this table.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


<b>8</b>’


<b>22</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Presentation Dialogue. B2.P135</b>
<b> </b>


<b>II. Practice.</b>



<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Practice speaking. B2.P135</b>


<i><b>2.</b></i> <b>Dialogue Build.</b>
<b>a. Volleyball</b>


- should / visit / grandmother
- the weekend / Saturday afterday.


<b>b. chess.</b>


- ought to / help / dad


- Wednesday night / six o’clock.


<b>c. badminton </b>


- must / go / dentist


- Sunday morning / 10 o’clock


<b>3. Survey. A2.P130</b>


- Eg: what sports do you like best ?
Or Is --- your most favorite sport ?
If not what is your first choice ?


<b>IV. Production.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

- Ss make their own dialogue
using the 3 pictures on P.135



S1: come and play …..
S2: I’m sory ….


S1: why not ….


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 17/03/2010



Teaching : 24/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 84 </b>



<b>Unit 13: </b>

<b>Activities</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B3 Come and play </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read comprehension questions and


<b>couldn t</b>


“ ’ ” for the past ability.



<b> </b>2. Skills : reading skill development


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by



“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<i><b>2. Activity 2.</b></i>
- T elicits and presents


B3.P133 and asks ss to
predict which sentences are
True and which ones are
False in B3.P137


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read and check
their predictions.


- T asks ss to read again and
make questions to these
answers.


<i><b>4. Activity 4.</b></i>
- ss talk about these


inventions in B3.P137.


<b>8</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>17</b>’



<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>




<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- under water: díi níc


- scuba diving: lặn có bình dỡng khí
- a vessel: tàu thun


- (to) explore: kh¸m ph¸
- (to) invent: phát minh


- special breathing equipment: thiết bị thở ®biƯt
- camera: m¸y quay phim


“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<b> </b>


<b>II. Pre-reading.</b>


<b> 1. T/F statement prediction. B3.P137</b>


<b>III. While-reading.</b>



<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Read and check. B3.P137</b>
<b>Answer key</b>


1. F 2.T 3. F 4. F 5. T


<i><b>2.</b></i> <b>Answer given.</b>


<b>a. </b>2 minutes <b>d.</b> the early 1940s


<b>b. </b>a long time<b> e. </b>underwater life.


<b>c. </b>1997<b> f. </b>with special TV cameras


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 <b>Grids.</b>


<b>Verbs </b> <b>Sentences</b>


- Special
breathing
equipment


- explore the
oceans


- learn about
the sea.


- before


special
breathing
equipment,
we couldn’t...
- electricity - read all


night


- watch TV


- before
electricity, we
couldn’t...


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 17/03/2010



Teaching : 25/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 85 </b>



<b>Unit 14: </b>

<b>Fretime fun</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1 Time for TV.P139-140 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen for specific information about Lan


and Hoa.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listen and speaking skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- ss play game “<b> Pelmanism </b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


<b>5</b>’



<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>
<b> </b>


<b> * </b> Pelmanism.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b> Matching </b>”
- T elicits and presents A1.P139.
- T predicts what Lan and Hoa
usually do in the evening.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to listen and check
their predictions.


- T corrects them.


- Ss listen again and choose
the best answer in A1.P140



<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss walk around the class to ask and
answer questions to fill in this table
- Eg: S1: Do you usually watch TV
in your freetime ?


- S2: Yes, I do / No, I don’t.


<b>17</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>II. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- an adventure: cuéc phiªu lu
- a cricket: con dÕ


- series: nhiÒu tËp
- (to) guess: đoán
- chess: (n) cờ


- (to) prefer: thích hơn


<b> Matching </b>”


<b> </b>



<b> 2. Open prediction. A1.P139</b>


- What do Lan and Hoa usually do in the
evening?


<b>II. While-listening.</b>


<b> 1. Listen and check prediction. A1.P139</b>
<b> 2. Multiple choice.A1.P140</b>


<b>Answer key.</b>


a. C b. A c.B d. C e. D


<b>V. Post-listening.</b>


 Find someone who. A1.P139
Find someone who… Name
read books …


watch TV ….
play soccer ….


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’


- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Preparation: 22/03/2010



Teaching : 29/03/2010

<b> </b>



<b>Period 86 </b>



<b>Unit 14: </b>

<b>Fretime fun</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2 Time for TV.P141 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice speaking with “ what would you
like to watch ?” question and answer “ I’d like to watch …” to talk about ss’ favorite
TV programs.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.



<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>
- ss play game
“<b> Slap the board</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>


<b>4</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>


<b> * Slap the board</b>


<b>II. Presentation. </b>



<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- a cowboy movie: Phim cao båi
- detective: (n) trun trinh th¸m
- new age theater: RCP thÕ hƯ míi
- culture house: (n) nhµ văn hoá


- beautiful summer: (n) mựa hố ti p
- easy life:(n) c/s dễ chịu


news movi


e
concert


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>remember </b>”


- T elicits and presents A2.P141.
- T gives model sentences.
- T does the concept-check.
- ss copy down.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice in a role
- T and whole class


- Half and half



- Open and close pairs
- Ss practice speaking the


dialogue A2.P141


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss practice speaking by making the
dialogue.


- Eg:


S1: would you like to go to the
theater ?


- S2: Yes, I’d love to/ I’m sorry, I
can’t.


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b> </b>


<b> 2. Presentation Dialogue. A1.P139</b>
<b>Model sentences.</b>



S1: what would you like to watch ?
S2: I’d like to watch a cowboy movie.
+ Form: - What would + S + like to watch ?
- S + would like to watch + N…


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 Word cue drill.


- football / “beautiful summer”
- cowboy / “easy life”


- detective


 Practice speaking the dialogue.A2.P141


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Mapped dialogue.


Hoa Lan


Would … theater ? Good … what would
you …


Easy life … Youth


theater. Ok. night.… Tuesday
Sorry … English club



How .. Thursday.. Ok.
Fine, Let’s ….


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



Preparation: 25/03/2010



Teaching : 30/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 87 </b>



<b>Unit 14: </b>

<b>Fretime fun</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read a text to understand the details about
television in Viet Nam.


<b> </b>2. Skills : reading skill development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>
- ss play game
“<b> Shark attack</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>What and </b>
<b>where</b>”


- T elicits and presents A3.P142.
- T asks ss to close their books


and predict which sentences
are True and which ones are
false



- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text and
check their predictions.
- T gets feed back and corrects
- Ss read again and make


questions to these answers.
- T helps ss to make questions.


<b>4</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>
<b> * Shark attack</b>


<b>T E L E V I S I O N</b> ( 10 letters )


<b>II. Pre-reading. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>



- an owner: chủ sở hữu, ngời sở hữu
- a program: (n) chơng tr×nh


- (to) gather: tập trung
- (to) change: thay đổi
- popular: (a) phổ biến


<b> What and where</b>“ ”


<b> </b>


<b> 2. T/F statements Prediction. A3.P142</b>
<b>a. </b>Thirty year ago in VN, a lot of people had
TV sets.


<b>b. </b>These TV owners were very popular.


<b>c. </b>The neighbors gathered to watch colour
program in the evening.


<b>d.</b> now they don’t spend much time together.


<b>e.</b> a few people have TV sets today.


<b>II. While-reading.</b>


 <b>Read and check prediction</b>.
- Answer key.



1. F 2.T 3. F 4. T 5. F


 Answer given. A3.P142.
a. No, very few people.


b. The black and white program.
c. They might sleep very little.
d. No, no one


e. In their living rooms.


<b>III. Post-reading.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss don’t read the text and complete
the summary in the book at P.142
- T checks and corrects.


Answer key.


1. people 2. not 3. TV
4. popular 5. evening 6. gather
7. they 8. today 9. have
10. life 11. know


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 25/03/2010



Teaching : 31/03/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 88 </b>



<b>Unit 14: </b>

<b>Fretime fun</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1-2 What s on.P144 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to know more new vocab and practice this
question and answer “ what kinds of programs do you like ?” and “ I like programs
about …” to talk about your favorite programs.


<b> </b>2. Skills : Speaking and listening skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’



<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>Remember</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and presents B1.P144.
- T does the concept-check.
- ss copy down.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to practice
speaking in a role:


- T – whole class
- Half and half…


- Ss read again and answer
these questions.


- T helps ss to answer


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to listen and wrtie the
times of these programs.


<b>7</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Pre-reading. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- a kind: (n) lo¹i


- a cartoon: (n) phim hoạt hình
- a fistful: (n) nắm đấm



- a sports show: (n) buổi trình diễn thời trang
- weather forecast: (n) dự báo thêi tiÕt


- teenagers: thiÕu niªn


“<b> Rub out and remember</b>”


<b> </b>


<b>II. Presentation. B1.P144</b>
<b>Model sentences</b>


- <b>What kinds of program do you like ?</b>


- <b>I like programs about teenagers</b>
<b>III. Practice.</b>


 <b>Word cue drill.</b>
<b>- </b>Weather


<b>-</b> Cartoons


<b>-</b> Early news


<b>-</b> Children


<b>- </b>Teenagers


 <b>Comprehension questions.</b>



- <b>B1.P144 a -> e.</b>


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Listening.B2.P145
Answer key.
1. at five


2. at six
3. ten past six
4. a quarter past six
5. at seven.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 28/03/2010



Teaching : 01/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 89 </b>



<b>Unit 14: </b>

<b>Fretime fun</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B3-4 What s on.P146 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand the details about popular TV
programs



<b> </b>2. Skills : writing and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Matching</b>”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read these
sentences and predict which


<b>7</b>’


<b>6</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- an audience: (n) khán giả
- a band: (n) ban nh¹c
- a contest: (n) cuéc thi
- a contestant: (n) thÝ sinh


- an import: (n) phim nhËp khÈu
- satellite: vÖ tinh


“<b> Matching</b>”


<b> </b>


<b> 2. T/F statements. B1.P144</b>



a. Pop music, contests, imports are popular TV
programs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

sentences are True and
which ones are False
- T gets feed back.


<i><b>3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read the text and
check their predictions.
- T asks ss to read again and


answer the questions a -> d
in the book on P146.


- Ss complete the passage
using the words in the box.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- T asks ss to walk around and ask
& answer to fill in the table.


<b>17</b>’


<b>7</b>’


d. The contestants are students, workers, and


TV viewers.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 <b>Read and check prediction.</b>
<b>Answer Key</b>


1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F


 <b>Comprehension questions.</b>
<b>- B3.P146 a -> d.</b>


 <b>Writing: EX 4.P146</b>


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Survey.B4.P146


name Popmusic contest imports Others


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

Preparation: 01/04/2010



Teaching : 05/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 90 </b>



<b>The written test 45</b>




<b>I. The aims.</b>


- To help ss to systematize the content from unit 12 to unit 14 and review grammar:
- S + would like and adv


- Too, either, so, neither


- modal verbs: ought to, must, should, can, could …
- like / prefer + “to infinitive” and like + verb_ing


<b>II. The content</b>


<b>1. Questions.</b>


<i><b>1. Question 1. circle the best answer.</b></i>


1. You should ….. listen to the pool life guards


a. carefully b. careful c. careless


2. …… something to drink ?


a. would you to like b. would you like c. you’d like
3. We ….. all learn to swim


a. ought not to b. must not c. should
4. I …. like bananas. Neither do I


a. don’t b. do c. doesn’t



5. I like mangoes. So ….. I


a. does b. don’t c. do


<i><b>2. Question 2. put the verbs in brackets into the correct form.</b></i>
<i><b>1.</b></i> Many years ago, very few people ( have ) TV sets


<i><b>2.</b></i> They ( watch ) the black and white programs.


<i><b>3.</b></i> Life ( tobe ) more comfortable now.


<i><b>4.</b></i> The children might ( play ) with their friends.


<i><b>5.</b></i> I don’t ( like ) eggs. Neither do I.


<i><b>3. Question 3. Put these sentences in the correct order to make dialogue.</b></i>


<b> </b>


A. Would you like to go to the movies this evening ?
B. I’d like to stay at home and listen to music.


C. Oh, That sounds boring to me


D. well, what would you like to do now ?
E. Oh, I’m sorry. I don’t like watching films.


<i><b>4. Question 4. Complete the Instructions to make a cucumber salad.</b></i>





1. ….. the cucumbers and the onions
2. …... the cucumbers and the onions


3. ….. a little salt, sugar and vinegar to the mixture
4. ….. the mixture


5. ….. for five minutes and serve your selves.


<b>2. Answer keys and points. </b>


* Question1(2,5p): 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. a 5. c


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

* Question 2(2,5p): 1. had 2. watched 3. is
4. play 5. like


* Question 3(2,5p): 1. A 2. E 3. D 4. B 5. C


* Question 4 (2,5p): 1. wash
2. slice
3. add
4. stir
5. wait.


<b>3. Result and percent</b>


Total of students: …………. Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %


- Good: ……… %


- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation</b>


<b> - </b>T comments ss’ attitude and ss’ attention


<b>5. homework.</b>


- Prepare for next lesson.


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/04/2010



Teaching : 06/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 91 </b>



<b>Unit 15: </b>

<b>Going out</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1.P147 Video games </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice in WH questions and give advice
for not doing something.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>


<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


- T sets the scene and models
- T gives model sentences.
- Ss listen and copy down
- Ss practice speaking.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>



- T asks ss to practice


speaking in a role of Lan and
Nam.


- Ss read the dialogue again
and answer these questions
a -> g.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss practice speaking.
S1: where are you going ?


S2: I’m going to the amusement
center.


S1: what are you going to do ?
S2: I’m going to play video games
S1: How often do you play ?
S2: twice a week.


S1: Don’t spend too much time on
playing video games


S2: don’t worry, I won’t
S1: Don’t forget to do your


<b>9</b>’



<b>18</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- the amusement center: (n) trung tâm giải trí
- addictive: (a) gây nghiện


- the arcade: (n) khu vui chơi
- (to) stay: ë


- (to) spend: dµnh
- (to) worry: lo l¾ng


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b> </b>


<b> 2. Presentation. A1.P147</b>
<b>Model sentences.</b>


- Don’t spend too much time in the
arcade.



- No, I won’t.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 <b>Practice speaking.A1.P147</b>


 <b>Comprehension questions.</b>
<b>- A1.P147 a -> g.</b>


<b>III. Production.</b>


 Mapped dialogue.


You Your friend


Where… going ? Amusement center ?
What … do ? Video games


How often …? Twice a week
Don’t spend… Video


games Don’t ….. won’t
Don’t forget …


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

homework.
S2: No, I won’t.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.


- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 02/04/2010



Teaching : 06/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 92 </b>



<b>Unit 15: </b>

<b>Going out</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A2-3.P148-149 Video games </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details about video and video
games.


<b> </b>2. Skills : writing and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’



<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 5 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits
- T asks ss to close their books


and predict which sentences
are T and which ones are F.
- T gets feed back.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read A2.P148


and check their prediction.
- T gets feed back.


- Ss read the text again to
match these English words
with their suitable


Vietnamese meaning


- Ss read the text again and do
the “ Multiple choice” in
A2.P149


- T corrects them.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss complete the text about
videos by fill in the gaps in
A3.P149


- Discuss about the headlines
of the 3 paragraphs.


<b>12</b>’


<b>19</b>’


<b>6</b>’



<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>


- dizzy:(a) hoa mắt, choáng váng
- social skill: (a) kĩ năng giao tiếp
- an inventor: (n) nhà phát minh
- The premise: (n) đất đai, nhà cửa
- The industry: (n) nền công nghiệp
- a robbery: (n) vụ cớp


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b> 2. T/F statements Prediction. A2.P148</b>


a. Children like playing video games because
they are good fun


b. It’s very good for children to spend too much
time on their own.


c. Playing video games for a long time will
make children become dizzy.


d. Children must play outdoors with their
friends.


e. some inventors become rich when they are


very young.


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 <b>Check prediction.A2.P148</b>
<b>Answer key.</b>


a. T b. F c. T d. F e. T


<b>Matching.A2.P148</b>


A B


careful Chơi ngoài trời


develop Quên


Take part in CÈn thËn
Play outdoors Ph¸t triĨn


forget Tham gia


 <b>Multiple choice.</b>


- A2.P148-149:


Answer key: a. D b. A c. D d. B


<b>III. Production.</b>



 Gapfill.A3.P149


Answer key.


1. be 2. have 3. is
4. identify 5. are 6. use
7. can 8. will 9. buy
10. show.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 04/04/2010



Teaching : 12/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 93 </b>



<b>Unit 15: </b>

<b>Going out</b>



<b>Lesson 3. A2.P148 Video games </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to give advice to others with “ should and
shouldn’t ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.



<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T lets ss play games.
“ Slap the board”


<b>5</b>’ <b>I. Warm up. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Slap the board.</b>


<b>Play </b>
<b>out </b>
<b>door</b>



<b>Play </b>
<b>video </b>
<b>games</b>


<b>Play </b>
<b>with </b>
<b>friends</b>


<b>Take part </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models
A2.P148


- T gives model sentences
- T does the concept-check.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss read the text A2.P148 and
fill in this table.


- Ss compare it in pairs


- Ss use the grids to make
sentences about what the
should do or shouldn’t do …



<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss make sentences with should
and shouldn’t by playing game.
- Eg: we shouldn’t play video
games too much.


- Eg: We should play out doors.


<b>8</b>’


<b>18</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>II. Presentation.</b>


 <b>Presentation Text. A2.P148</b>
<b>Model sentences.</b>


- Children should play out doors.


- They shouldn’t play video games for a
long time.


<b>III. Practice.</b>


 Grids.A2.P148



<b>Activities in free time</b> <b>Should</b> <b>Should t</b>’


<b>Play out doors</b> <b>v</b>


<b>Play video games for a long time</b> <b>v</b>
<b>Take part in activities with their friend</b> <b>v</b>


<b>Spend a little time playing video games</b> <b>v</b>


<b>Spend too much time on your own.</b> <b>v</b>


 Speaking.
- Eg:


S1: we should play out doors.


S2: Yes, we should / No, we shouldn’t.


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 noughts and crosses.
Play out


doors Spend muchmoney on
video games


Take part in
activities.
Stay up too



late Play videogames so
much


Be with
people of our


age
Spend little


time playing


video games Study hard


Spend too
much time on


your own.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 06/04/2010



Teaching : 14/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 94 </b>



<b>Trả chữa bài kiểm tra 45 </b>



<b>I . The aims</b>



- help ss to have experience from their writing test.
- master how to use :


+ would like and adverbs
+ model verbs


+ so / either / neither / too.


- ss will appreciate themselves their level of achievement<b>. </b>
<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: writing test, text book, reference book, answer key.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> (5 )</b>’


- T asks ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives mark.


<b>3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<b> 1. Activity1. </b>


- T retells the use and form of
these structures which were used in


the writing test.


- ss listen and copy down.
<b>2. Activity 2. </b>




- Teacher gives the answer key for
ss to compare.


<b>3. Activity 3</b>.


- T corrects some mistakes that ss


<b>9</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. The structures in the writing test. </b>


1. Model verbs: should, ought to, must, can...
2. Like / Prefer + Verb_ing.


Like + to - infinitive
3. Too / so / either / neither.
4. would like and adverbs.



<b>II. The answer key and points</b>.
* Question1(2,5p):


1. a 2. b 3. c 4. a 5. c
* Question 2(2,5p):


1. had 2. watched 3. is
4. play 5. like


* Question 3(2,5p):


1. A 2. E 3. D 4. B 5. C
* Question 4 (2,5p):


1. wash 2. slice 3. add
4. stir 5. wait.


<b>III. The mistakes that ss often make</b>


1. like + V_ing and Like + to infi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

often make
<b>4. Activity 4.</b>




- T gets ss’ points and percentages of
ss’ writing test.


<b>8</b>’ neither. 3. the place of adverbs in the sentences.



<b>IV. The result of ss writing test.</b>’
Total of students: ………….


Total of ss’ writing papers: …………
- Excellent: ……… %
- Good: ……… %
- Fair: ……… %
- Poor: ……… %
- Fail: ……… %


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 08/04/2010



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

<b>Period 95 </b>



<b>Unit 15: </b>

<b>Going out</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B1,2. In the city </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details about life in the city and life
in the country.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.


- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T asks ss to come to the bb to
find out the vocab that they’ve
learnt.


<b> </b>Neighbor


Quiet, noise, village …
Traffic, club …


City cars
Busy road


Motorbikes


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their


notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss come to the bb to write as
many as they can.


<b>5</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>




<b>1</b>. <b>Word square.</b>


H R O B H G I E N


O C L U B Z W S C


O Z K S J V Q I E


D R S Y M N T O G


M Z J R K Y T N A



O P C O Q Z E J L


T T R A F F I C L


O X L D R N U B I


R B I K E S Q K V


<b>II. Pre-reading.</b>
<b>1. Pre-teach.</b>


- The rest: thời gian còn lại
- awake: thøc giÊc, tØnh dËy
- (to) scare: sỵ h·i


- (to) get used to: quen với cái gì
- (to) keep: giữ


- (to) cross: ®i ngang qua


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b>2. Brainstorming.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

- T gets feed back.


<i><b> </b></i>



<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss practice the dialogue and
add some more information.
- ss read the text again and
answer these questions a-> f in
B1.P151


<i><b>5. Activity 5.</b></i>


- ss discuss about life in the city
and in the country.


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>III. While - reading.</b>


 Read the dialogue. B1.P151


 Comprehension qusetions.B1.P151
- a -> f.P151


<b>Answer key.</b>


1. She goes to the school theater club.
2. No, she doesn’t


3. She lived in a village near Hue.


4. because she knew all her neighbors.
5. because she hates the noise and the busy


roads.


6. she hates crossing the road most because
there are bikes, motorbikes and cars
coming from every direction.


<b>IV. Post-reading.</b>


 B2.P151.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 08/04/2010



Teaching : 19/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 96 </b>



<b>Unit 15: </b>

<b>Going out</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B3,4. In the city </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen and read activities in the evening.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


<b>Life in the </b>
<b>country</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.



<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”



- T asks ss to think of this
question.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to read B3.P151
and answer these questions.
- T gets feed back.


- Ss read the text again and
make a list of things Hoa
does in the evening.
- T corrects them.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss listen and match each
name to an activity in
B4.P152


<b>10</b>’


<b>13</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Vocabulary.</b>



- regularly:(a) đều đặn
- rarely: (a) hiếm khi
- (to) socialize: xã hội hoá
- (to) play chess : chơi cờ
- (to) cost : giá trị


- thousands : (n) hàng nghìn


<b>Rub out and remember</b>




<b> 2. Pre-questions. </b>


What did Hoa and her friends do in the
evening?


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 <b>Comprehension questions.B3.P151</b>


a. why did Hoa rarely go to the movies or eat
out in the evening ?


b. Did Hoa like to read ?


c. Could Hoa read many books in her village ?
why ?



d. Where could Hoa borrow books in the city ?
e. why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so
bad after all ?


 <b>Make a list of things Hoa does in the </b>
<b>evening.</b>


<b>III. Production.</b>


 <b>Listening. B4.P152</b>


Answer key.
Ba _ b Nga _ d
Hoa _ a Nam _ c
Lan _ f An _ e


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 12/04/2010



Teaching : 21/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 97 </b>



<b>Revision</b>


<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:



- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review the structures and vocab in unit 15
and more practice with modal verbs: should and shouldn’t


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T explains these target items
- Ss copy down in their



notebook.


- T asks ss to give example for
each form


<b>18</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>I. Presentation. </b>


<b>1</b>. <b>Modal verbs.</b>


- S + should / shouldn’t + V(infi) + N ….


<b>2. Adj & adv. </b>


- Adverb of manner: Adj + ly = Adv


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to put the tick in
the correct column if these
words are Adj or Adv.
- T gets feed back.


- T asks ss to read these
sentences and underline the
suitable word to complete
these sentences



- T corrects them.


- T asks ss to give some
advice to these situations
using modal verbs should /
shouldn’t.


 <b>Check the correct box.</b>


Words Adj Adv


Dangerous
Slowly
Skillfully


Good
Bad
quickly


 <b>Complete the sentences</b>


a. He ran …. ( quick / quickly )


b. My grandmother walks …. ( slow / slowly )
c. What a .. ( good / well ) baby ! he sleeps all
night and he never cries during the day


d. Rock climbing is a ( dangerous /
dangerously) activity.



 <b>Giving some advice using should or </b>
<b>shouldn t.</b>’


a. I’m sick -> you should ………
b. It’s very hot -> you shouldn’t …..
c. I’m cold -> you should …..
d. I’m tired -> you should …..


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

Preparation: 18/04/2010



Teaching : 26/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 98 </b>



<b>Unit 16: </b>

<b>People and places</b>



<b>Lesson 1. A1,2. Famous places in Asia </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review the simple present tense with
frequency adverbs to talk about famous places.



<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- Ss play game “ pelmanism”


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T elicits and models



- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


- T sets the scene
- T elicits the dialogue


<b>4</b>’


<b>11</b>’


<b>I. Warm up. </b>
<b> Pelmanism.</b>
A
lw
ay
s
o
ft
en
u
su
al
ly
so


m
et
im
es
n
ev
er
lu
ô
n
l
u
ô
n
th

n
g
th

n
g
x
u
y
ên
th
ỉn
h
t

h
o
ản
g
K
h
ô
n
g
b
ao
g

<b> II. Presentation.</b>
<b>1. Pre-teach.</b>


- an album: (n) quyÓn an bum
- region: (n) vïng miỊn


- occasionally: thØnh tho¶ng
- a pilot: (n) phi c«ng
- stamp: (n) tem th


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

- Ss read the dialogue and
draw out sentences


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss practice speaking the
dialogue.



- Ss read again to do the
matching.


- Ss complete the table in
A2.P155 using the names of
the countries


- Ss work in pairs to practice
speaking about this table.


<i><b> 4. Activity 4.</b></i>


- ss play game “ noughts and
crosses”


- Example: He often flies to
Hong Kong.


<b>16</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b>2. Presentation Dialogue.</b>


* A1.P154



Examples


- He usually flies to Hong Kong
- He sometimes goes to Phnom Penh.


<b>III. Practice.</b>


 Read the dialogue. A1.P154
- Matching.


- Answer key.


a. D b. F c. B d. C e. A f. E


 Complete the table.A2.P155
- Word cue drill ( use the table )


<b>Example</b>


1. where does Ba’s uncle fly to ?
2. He usually flies to BangKok
3. where is it ?


4. It is in Thailand


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Noughts and crosses.
He/fly/



Bangkok I / not / travel/ Singapore She / go / PhnomPenh
You / visit /


Beijing They / send / postcard /
Jakarta


He / fly /
Hong Kong.
They / fly /


Kuala
Lumpur


He / go /


Vietiane She / travel / Yangon.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………


….


………
….


Preparation: 21/04/2010



Teaching : 26/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 99 </b>



<b>Unit 16: </b>

<b>People and places</b>



<b>Lesson 2. A3,4. Famous places in Asia </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read a text about the interests with modal
verbs: “ may ”


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>


<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> (1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>
<b>remember</b>”


- T asks ss to think of this
question.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- Ss read the text A4.P156 and


answer question a and b in
the book.


- Ss read again and make 3
kinds of tourist attractions.
- Answer key.


1. b 2. c, e 3. a, d.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss listen and complete the
pilot’s schedule with the


<b>8</b>’


<b>17</b>’


<b>7</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b>1. Pre-teach.</b>


- attraction: (n) sù hÊp dÉn.
- ancient monument: (n) tợng cổ
- coral : (n) san hô


- resort : (n) khu nghỉ mát
- culture : (n) văn hoá
- (to) admire: chiªm ngìng



<b>Rub out and remember</b>


“ ”


<b>2. Pre-question.</b>


* A4.P156


- Why do tourists like to visit South East
Asia ?


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 Reading. A4.P156


- Comprehension questions.
- a & b on page 157


 Matching.A4.P156


A B


1. Ancient
monument


a. you can swim and dive


b. you may visit the Khmer temples
of Angkor watt



2. Shows c. you can see colorful corals and
fish.


d. you can see colorful dances or
shadow puppet show ….


3. Resorts and


beaches e. you can listen to and enjoy traditional music during the
performance


<b>IV. Production.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

correct place names.
- T gets feedback.


Mon: Bangkok and Singapore
Tue: Singapore


Wed: Jakarta
Thurs: Bali
Fri: Bali


Sat: Hong Kong
Sun: back to Hanoi


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.


- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………


….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 22/04/2010



Teaching : 27/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 100 </b>



<b>Unit 16: </b>

<b>People and places</b>



<b>Lesson 3. B1,3. Famous people. P157-159 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to listen for details about a famous people and
historic place. Read about the Dien Bien Phu


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook



<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Matching</b>”


- T sets the scene and elicits the
dialogue in B1.P157


- T asks ss to close their book
and predict which sentences are
True and which ones are False.
- T gets feed back.



<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- Ss listen and check their
predictions.


- T gets feed back.


- Ss read the dialogue to fill in
the table.


<b>- </b> ss read the text B3.P159 and
answer the questions a -> c.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss use the information in the table
and in the dialogue to write about
General Vo Nguyen Giap.


<b>8</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>5</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>
<b>1. Pre-teach.</b>



- a quiz: (n) câu đố.
- a battle: (n) trận đánh
- The general : (n) đại tớng
- (to) lead : lãnh đạo
- (to) defeat : đánh thắng


- (to) be famous for..: nổi tiếng vì
- force: lực lợng


<b>Matching</b>




<b>2. T/F statements Prediction.</b>


* B1.P158
- a-> f.P158


<b>II. Practice.</b>


 Listening. B1.P157
- <b>Listen and check.</b>


Answer key.


a. T b. F c. T d. F e.T f. F
- Grids and Form (with answer key)
Name <i>Vo Nguyen Giap</i>



Year of birth <i>1911</i>


Job <i>General / commander-in-chief</i>


Famous for <i>Leading the people s army of</i>’


<i>Viet Nam</i>


The battle <i>Dien Bien Phu</i>


 Reading. B3.P159


- Comprehension question. B3.P159
a -> c on page 159


<b>IV. Production.</b>


 Write it up.


- Ss use the cues from the Form and


information in the dialogue to write a short
paragraph about General Vo Nguyen Giap.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

- T comments this period and ss’ attention


- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 22/04/2010



Teaching : 28/04/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 101 </b>



<b>Unit 16: </b>

<b>People and places</b>



<b>Lesson 4. B4. Famous people. P159-160 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to read for details about famous people and
talking about their biographies.


<b> </b>2. Skills : speaking and reading skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’



- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and models


- Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and individually.


- Ss copy down in their
notebook.


- T checks by “<b>Rub out and </b>


<b>8</b>’ <b>I. Pre-reading.</b>
<b>1. Pre-teach.</b>


- a bulb: (n) bóng đèn


- an invention: (n) sự phát minh
- a gramophone : (n) máy quay đĩa
- an actor : diễn viên


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>remember</b>”



- T sets the scene and introduces
Thomas Edison and Hans Christian
Andersen.


- T asks ss to predict what They
did by doing the matching.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- Ss read B4.P159 and check
their predictions.


- T gets feed back.


- Ss read again and make
questions to these answers.
- T gets feed back


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- ss use the information in B4.P160
to ask and answer about Edison….


<b>5</b>’


<b>20</b>’



<b>5</b>’


- a motion picture: TV, tranh c.động
- an author : tác giả


- a fairy tale : chun cỉ tÝch
“<b> Rub out and remember </b>”


<b>2. Open Prediction.</b>


* Matching.


<b>Thomas Edison</b> <b>Hans Christian Andersen</b>


a bulb an author
an invention of a


grammophone


an author
establish a fairy tale


<b>II. While-reading.</b>


 Read and check prediction. B4.P159


 Answer given. B4.P159
a. an in ventor.


b. the electric light bulb



c. the grammophone and motion pictures
d. a Danish author


e. an actor


f. Novels, plays, poetry ….
g. the fairy tales.


<b>IV. Post-reading.</b>


 Role play.B4.P160 a, b.


S1: when were you born, Mr Edison ?
S2: I was born in 1847


S1: Were you born in America ?
.


…………


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.



- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 24/04/2010



Teaching :

… …

./

/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 102 </b>




<b>Unit 16: </b>

<b>People and places</b>



<b>Lesson 5. B2,5. Famous people. P161 </b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice with “ prefer / like / favorite ” to
talk about famous people.


<b> </b>2. Skills : listening and writing skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’


- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:



<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T elicits and presents the
dialogue B2.P158


- Ss complete the dialogue with
the words in the box.


- T gets feed back.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to predict the
places where Uncle Ho
travelled to.


- T gets feed back.


- T reads 3 or 5 times.


- T asks ss to listen and fill in


<b>10</b>’


<b>20</b>’


<b>I. Presentation.</b>



<b>1. Complete the Dialogue.B2.P158</b>


Answer key.
1. like 2. prefer
3. guess 4. favorite


<b>II. Listening.</b>


1. B5.P161
- Feed back:


Eg: Africa, England, Guangzhow,
Moscow ……


2. Listening. B5.P161


<b>Events</b> <b>Year</b> <b>Place</b>
<b>Date of birth</b> <b>1890</b> <b>Kim Lien</b>
<b>Left Viet Nam</b> <b>1911</b> <b>Africa,</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

the missing information into
this table.


- T gets feed back and check.


<i><b> 3. Activity 3.</b></i>


- Ss use the information in the table
above to write about the places


where Uncle Ho travelled to.


<b>8</b>’


<b>Moscow…</b>
<b>Worked in a hotel</b> <b>1900s</b> <b>London</b>
<b>Went to another country</b> <b>1917</b> <b>Paris</b>


<b>Moved again</b> <b>1923</b> <b>Moscow</b>
<b>Founded Vietnamese</b>


<b>communist Party</b>


<b>1930</b> <b>Guangzhow</b>
<b>Formed Viet Minh front</b> <b>1941</b> <b>VN</b>


<b>Became President</b> <b>1945</b> <b>VN</b>
<b>Died </b> <b>1969</b> <b>Hanoi</b>


<b>IV. Post-reading.</b>


1. Write it up.B5.P161


- ss use the information in the table above
to write about Ho Chi Minh.


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.



<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’
- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for next lesson :


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….



<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/05/2010



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

<b>Period 103 </b>



<b>Language focus 5.</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to practice in expressing likes and dislikes,
why / because, simple past and simple present, present progressive, simple future


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


<b> </b>1. Teacher: Lesson plan, text book, poster, picture.
2. Students: English 7, notebook, and workbook


<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( 4 )</b>’



- Teacher asks 3 ss to come to the bb to write vocab and do exercises in work book.
- T checks and gives marks.


<b> 3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>


<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T asks ss to look at the table
and do the matching the likes and
dislikes expressions on the bottom
left. P165


- Ss compare it inpairs
- T gets feed back.


- T gives form and usage the
tenses that they have learnt
- ss copy down.


- T asks ss to give some modal
verbs that they have learnt


- T asks ss to give the way to
form the ADV of manner from
ADJ


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>



- T asks ss to do exercises in
the book with these above
target items that they have
reviewed


<b>4</b>’


<b>10</b>’


<b>4</b>’


<b>3</b>’


<b>3</b>’


<b>14</b>’


<b>I. </b>


<b> Presentation.</b>


<b> </b>


<b> 1. Likes and dislikes.</b>


Likes Dislikes


<b>I d like ’</b> <b>…..</b> <b>I don t really like’</b>
<b>I prefer …..</b> <b>No, I don t like’</b> <b>…</b>
<b>Yes, that sounds nice</b> <b>I don t know ’</b> <b>…..</b>



<b> </b>


<b> 2. The Tense.</b>


1. The Language focus 5.
- Simple present


- Past simple
- Future…


<b> 3. Modal verbs.</b>


1. Can
2. should
3. ought to


4. may / might ….


<b> </b>


<b> 4. Adv & Adj</b>




<b>5. Why / Because</b>.


<b>II. </b>


<b> Practice.</b>



<b>1. ADV & ADJ</b>


- Exercise 1.P 162


<b>2. Modal verbs.</b>


- Exercise 2.P162-163


<b>3. Likes & Dislikes.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

- T helps ss to do these
exercises.


- T gets feed back.


<b>4. Tenses</b>


- Exercise 4.P166


<b>5. Why / Because</b>


- Exercise 5. P167


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


<b> 5 . Appreciation & Home Work : ( 1 )</b>’


- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for the semester term 2:


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>



Preparation: 02/05/2010



Teaching :

… …

./

/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 104 </b>



<b>Semester revision</b>



<b>I . OBJECTIVES </b>


1. Objectives:


- By the end of the lesson ss will be able to review some grammar structures and vocab
that they have leanrt in this term.


<b> </b>2. Skills : 4 skills development


3. Attitude: ss will be self-imposed and active in studying lesson.


<b>II . Preparation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<b>III . PROCEDURES :</b>
<b>1. Organization</b>:<b> </b> <b>(1 )</b>’


<b>2. Checking the previous lesson</b>: <b> ( no )</b>
<b>3. </b>New lesson:


<b>T and SS Activities</b>’ <b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b>



<i><b> 1. Activity 1.</b></i>


- T asks ss to retells the use and
form of these grammar structures


- Ss compare it inpairs


- T gets feed back.


- T asks ss to give some
examples for each grammar
structure


- ss copy down.


<i><b> 2. Activity 2.</b></i>


- T asks ss to do exercises in
the book with these above
target items that they have
reviewed


- T helps ss to do these
exercises.


- T gets feed back.


<b>4</b>’


<b>6</b>’



<b>4</b>’


<b>2</b>’


<b>3</b>’


<b>8</b>’


<b>15</b>’


<b>I. </b>


<b> Presentation.</b>


<b> </b>


<b> 1. So/ too/ either/ neither.</b>


agree Disagree


<b>Eg: So do I</b> <b>Eg: Neither do I</b>
<b>I do, too</b> <b>I don t, either’</b>


<b>……</b> <b>…..</b>


<b> 2. Modal verbs.</b>


can
may


might


S + will + V(infi) ……..
must


should
ought to
…..


<b> 3. Suggestions.</b>


- let’s …..


- why don’t you ….
- what / how about ….


- why do you think? / what do you think ?


<b> </b>


<b> 4. Why / because</b>




<b>5. ADJ & ADV</b>


<b>6. Tense. </b>


a. Present simple
b. Present progressive


c. Future


d. Past simple… ( with Irregular verbs.P177)


<b>II. </b>


<b> Practice.</b>
- <b>Examples</b>


- <b>Exercises in work books.</b>


<b>4. Consolidation (1 )</b>’


- Teacher summarizes the whole lesson and emphasizes on the important points.
- Retells what they have leant in short.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

- T comments this period and ss’ attention
- SS do exercises in work book.


- Prepare for the semester term 2:


………
….


………
….


………
….



………
….


………
….


<b>========***========***=========</b>


Preparation: 02/05/2010



Teaching :

… …

./

/2010

<b> </b>


<b>Period 105 </b>



<b>Semester written test term 2</b>



</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×